Sie sind auf Seite 1von 139

Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve

Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report


for the year ended 31 December 2014
Cover pictures
Crushed ore stockpile at Damang
in Ghana
Fire assaying of gold samples at
Granny Smith in Australia
Contents

    INTRODUCTION IFC

    Group highlights 1

1   GROUP OVERVIEW 4

    Global presence 2

    Strategic pillars 5

    Headline numbers 6

    Group Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves 6


overview

    Assessment and reporting criteria 7

    Summary of the Gold Fields Limited Mineral 9


Resources and Mineral Reserves statement

    Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves split 9


per region and growth projects

    Annual change in managed gold Mineral 11


Resources and Mineral Reserves

    Operations exploration and QA/QC 13

2   REGIONS, OPERATIONS AND PROJECTS 14

  2.1 Americas region (Cerro Corona and projects – 16


Salares Norte and Woodjam)

  2.2 Australia region (Agnew, Darlot, Granny Smith, 34


St Ives plus Far Southeast (FSE) Project)

  2.3 South Africa region (South Deep) 86

  2.4 West Africa region (Damang and Tarkwa) 102

  2.5 Corporate Development projects (Arctic 128


Platinum (APP))

3   SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION 130

    Corporate governance (reporting code and 132


codes of practice)

    Competent Persons 133

    Conversion table 133

    Abbreviations 134

    Glossary of terms 135

Gold Fields Mineral Resource


Mineral Resource and
Mineral Reserve Supplement
to the Integrated Annual Review
and Mineral Reserve Supplement
to the Integrated Annual Review
31 December

2013

2013

Gold Fields Mineral Resource


Mineral Resources
and Mineral Reserves
Overview
31 December 2012 and Mineral Reserve Supplement
to the Integrated Annual Review
2012
 Gold
Go
ollld
old d Fields:
Fie
Field
el ds: Mineral
ld Miin
Mi
Minne
errra
era al Resources
al Re
es
eso
so
s ourc
rrc
ces
es and
an
and
nd Mineral
Miin
M ner
erra
all Reserves
Re
R
Res
ese
eserrv
erv
rves
es Overview
Ovverview
Ove rvi
viiew
ew 2012
20
2
201
01
012 2

Gold Fields Mineral Resource


Mineral Resources
and Mineral Reserves
Overview
31 December 2011
and Mineral Reserve Supplement
to the Integrated Annual Review
2011
2
Introduction

Introduction
The Gold Fields (GFI) portfolio consists of eight operating at supporting community development. Combining the latter
assets and a limited number of exploration or early stage with rigorous quality control on environmental compliance and
projects, which are grouped into four regions. The Australia an emphasis on the security of water and power, the Group’s
region consists of the St Ives, Granny Smith, Agnew and Darlot Mineral Reserves enjoy a strong, sustainable development
operations, as well as the FSE project. The Americas region underpin.
comprises the Cerro Corona mine and the Salares Norte and
Woodjam projects. South Deep Gold Mine is the only operation At the end of December 2014, Gold Fields has total
in the South Africa region, while the Tarkwa and Damang mines managed Mineral Resources, inclusive of growth projects,
in Ghana comprise the West Africa region. of 128.2 (136.7) million ounces (Moz) of gold and 13,666
(14,038) million pounds (Mlb) of copper respectively. Managed
The strategic decision in 2013 to focus the Group on ‘ounces Mineral Resources (excluding projects) are 103.9 (108.0)
in production’, coupled with the key strategic decision to focus Moz gold and 1,006 (1,124)Mlb copper net of depletion.
on quality, cash-accretive ounces, rather than greenfields The corresponding total managed gold and copper Mineral
exploration and project development, resulted in the majority Reserves are 52.1 (52.6)Moz net of 2.1Moz depletion, and
of the growth projects being classified as ‘assets for sale’. 623 (712)Mlb, net of 71Mlb depletion respectively.
The Mineral Resource Management strategy clearly positions
the group for margin, cash flow and growth, on a per share The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve guiding
and per ounce basis. To date three ‘non-core’ projects: Talas in principle is to ensure integrity, transparency and materiality
Kyrgyzstan, Yanfolila in Mali and Chucapaca in Peru have been in reporting, compliance with public regulatory codes and
successfully divested. Both the FSE project in the Philippines internal standards, and to inform all stakeholders on the status
and the Salares Norte project in Chile, continue to demonstrate of the Group’s fundamental asset base. Gold Fields is a mid-
the potential for significant future shareholder value and with a tier, unhedged producer of gold, with attributable, annualised
focus on realising this, they remain key assets in the portfolio. production of ~2.0Moz of gold and ~70Mlb of copper from
eight operating mines located in Australia, South Africa, Peru
In response to the downturn of the gold price, a number of and Ghana.  
initiatives have been implemented to assist in protecting the
viability of the operations and building a sustainable business The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves outlined in this
that continues to deliver cash flow and superior growth in overview provide the key anchor point for sustained operational
shareholder value. This is all undertaken while effectively still excellence, the generation of cash and margin, asset net
retaining longer-term optionality, so the portfolio can remain present values and a secure future for Gold Fields. The
leveraged to future gold price fluctuations. information in this report is presented on a Group and regional
basis in appropriate detail, summarising the current status and
The key initiatives include: changes at each operation and growth project. This report
should be read in conjunction with the Integrated Annual Report
• Use of a consistent planning gold price of US$1,300/oz and (IAR), which provides additional information regarding the
US$3.0/lb for copper but with a targeted margin of 15% to operations and their financial performance. 
protect the quality of the ore bodies and to ensure the Mineral
Important notices 
Reserve is resilient to metal price changes
1. All Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve figures reported
• Surface Mineral Resources are constrained by open-pit shells
are managed by Gold Fields unless otherwise stated. 
based on metal prices of US$1,500/oz for gold and US$3.5/lb
2. Mineral Resources are reported inclusive of Mineral
for copper and underground Mineral Resources are spatially
Reserves and Mineral Resources include stability
constrained within estimated mining volumes. This approach
pillars when appropriate (December 2013 statement’s
is adopted to eliminate the inclusion of non-contiguous
numbers are shown in brackets).
mineralisation from Mineral Resource estimates
3. The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are estimates
• Elimination of marginal mining at all the operations, as a result
at a point in time and will be affected by changes in the
of higher cut-off grades generally applied at each mine
gold price, US dollar currency exchange rates, permitting,
• A commitment to ongoing near-mine exploration to drive the
changes in legislation, costs and operating parameters. 
development of a focussed and steady pipeline of high-
4. Rounding-off of figures in this report may result in minor
quality Brownfield projects that will, over time, further enhance
computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not
overall cash returns
deemed significant.
• Rationalisation of capital expenditure to underpin increased
5. All references to tonnes (t) are metric units.
cash flow without compromising the future integrity of the
6. The 31 December 2014 Mineral Resource and Mineral
assets
Reserve figures are net of depletion.
• Corporate, regional and operational structures have been
7. Locations on maps are for indication only.
rationalised in conjunction with the strengthening of the
8. All metals (gold, platinum, palladium, silver, copper
regionalised model. The regions are now appropriately
and nickel) are reported individually and not as metal
resourced to focus on building a sustainable business
equivalents. 
Importantly, the Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves
are anchored at the operations by the maintenance of sound Note: For abbreviations refer to page 134 and for glossary of terms refer to page 135 –
stakeholder relationships based on Shared Value creation, aimed ‘Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement 2014’.  

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Introduction 1

Group highlights
Consistent operational delivery in 2014 according to the The sale of non-core projects is proceeding according to plan
market guidance provided, with all seven international to improve overall portfolio quality, with the divestment of the
operations being cash generative.  Chucapaca and Yanfolila projects in 2014.

A prime objective for the Australia region, in accordance At Salares Norte in Chile, infill-drilling on the high-grade portion
with the orogenic style of the ore bodies, continues to be of the main resource and resource delineation drilling at Agua
a significant investment in near-mine exploration with the Amarga is ongoing and post-completion of resource estimation
A$60 (US$54) million exploration programme conducted in and metallurgical test work a project milestone review is
2014 at all of the mines, aimed principally at improving the scheduled for H2 2015.
Mineral Resource and Reserve positions of these mines over
the next two to three years. Traction will be maintained in 2015 The regional operating model for the Group is now embedded
with exploration funded at A$85 (US$77) million to deliver and the regions are fully staffed with the required skills and have
growth within the targeted time frame.  the ability to strategically guide the respective operations and
growth opportunities to deliver according to the regional and
At Granny Smith’s Wallaby underground mine, 2014 corporate strategy.
extensional drilling in Zone 90 and infill, extensional and
step-out drilling on Zone 100, supported by resource drilling Importantly, the operating asset portfolio, excluding South Deep,
on Zone 110–120, has been very successful adding 1.4Moz delivers a consolidated 15% free cash flow (FCF) margin based
to the resource base. Exploration drilling on Zones 130–150 on the reported Mineral Reserves using a US$1,300/oz gold
have returned significant intercepts during the year that retain price and as generated by the December 2014 Life-of-Mine
a very positive outlook for the Wallaby deposit at depth. (LoM) plans. The LoM FCF percentage margins generated on a
consolidated regional basis are 15% Australia, 12% West Africa
At St Ives open-pit capital development has commenced on and 29% for the Americas region. Although South Deep currently
the newly discovered high-grade Invincible deposit with first reflects a robust LoM FCF margin in excess of 15%, until
production planned during H1 2015. profiling of the best value option and rebasing of South Deep is
complete, it is prudent to exclude the South Africa region at this
Cerro Corona exceeded its production guidance for the full stage from the consolidated numbers (refer to page 97 for more
year producing 329,000 gold equivalent ounces at AIC of detail).
US$641/oz vs. guidance of 290,000 equivalent ounces at an
AIC of US$865/eq oz. 

Tarkwa successfully upgraded its CIL plant from 12.3mtpa to


13.3mtpa post the planned shutdown of its North Heap Leach
operation. Tarkwa has achieved stability and continues to out-
perform against its production and cost guidance. Although
the heap leach operations have been discontinued, Tarkwa is

52.1
now more profitable, even at current lower gold prices.

Damang further consolidated its return to profitability and


exceeded its 2014 guidance of 165,000 ounces of production
at an AIC of US$1,240/oz. with production of 178,000 ounces
at an AIC of US$1,175/oz.
million ounces
At Agnew, the FBH newly defined, high-grade underground
ore body, sitting immediately to the south of the Kim ore body Managed gold Mineral Reserves
contains a 585koz Mineral Resource at an average grade
of approximately 9.5g/t. Development of the FBH ore body
started in 2014 and it represents the primary take-over mining
front at Waroonga as the Kim lode advances to maturity.

Darlot continues to offer upside potential from the newly


discovered Centenary Depth Analogue (CDA) area, which is
the focus for further exploration and infill-drilling and is viewed
as a potential replication of the ore body currently being

128.2
mined in the Centenary Deposit. 

South Deep embarked on an extensive ground support


remediation programme, is reviewing potential ‘game
changing’ mining methodologies through two pilot mining
projects and has appointed a new senior management
team tasked with the objective of making the operation million ounces
cash generative and establishing the mine as a core
franchise asset. Managed gold Mineral Resources

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
2 Introduction Introduction 3

KEY

Global presence
Mines Growth projects Corporate office Regional offices Assets for sale

Growth projects
Gold Fields has operations and growth Salares
projects within four key focus regions:
Mineral Resources APP FSE Norte Woodjam
Australia
Gold (Au) Moz 0.8 19.8 3.1 0.6 APP, Finland
• Americas
Platinum (Pt) Moz 2.4 MINERAL
• Australia RESOURCES
• South Africa Palladium (Pd) Moz 9.8
• West Africa Silver (Ag) Moz 33.6 Moz Au WESTERN AUSTRALIA
Copper
Nickel
(Cu)
(Ni)
Mlb
Mlb
1,034
438
9,921 1,705
10.0 Agnew/Lawlers Darlot
Woodjam, Attributable to GFI % 100 40 100 51
Granny Smith
Canada MINERAL RESERVES
Perth St Ives
West Africa Moz Au

Denver
MINERAL
3.6
RESOURCES
GHANA
Moz Au

14.8
MINERAL
RESERVES
Damang Far Southeast, Philippines
Moz Au Tarkwa Accra

8.7
Americas

MINERAL PERU Salares Norte, Chile


RESOURCES
Moz Au
Cerro Corona South Africa
3.0 Lima MINERAL
RESOURCES
Mlb (Cu)
SOUTH AFRICA
1,006
Moz Au

76.0 Johannesburg
MINERAL RESERVES MINERAL South Deep
Moz Au RESERVES
Mlb (Cu)

1.8 623
Moz Au

38.0
The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014 The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
4 Group overview

Group overview
In the context of Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves, the • Ensure an appropriate level of sustainability assurance
vision of global leadership in sustainable gold mining requires encompassing economic, ethics, employee, community and
the Group to: environment aspects as an important underpin to reported
Mineral Reserves
• Maintain strict adherence to the core value that ‘If we cannot • Ensure provision of water and energy supply to support the
mine safely, we will not mine’ which is the DNA core to the LoM plan and invoke security of supply measures where
entire value stream covering exploration, mine design and appropriate
scheduling, mining, processing, tailings management and • Embed and retain the required technical skills and
stakeholder engagement competencies to leverage operational excellence and drive
• Retain focus and traction on the key activities that provide business improvement opportunities that support Group
access to our ore bodies and future operational flexibility, strategy
primarily waste pre-stripping in the open pits and decline • Continue to apply Active Portfolio Management – including
and level access development underground the application of a strict screening process and stringent
• Maintain appropriate capital investment at the right time hurdle rates for all new growth opportunities to ensure all new
in infrastructure and equipment to underpin operational acquisitions actively upgrade the profile of Gold Fields’ long-
efficiencies and derisk-debottleneck the core business term portfolio.
• Continue targeted investment in relevant brownfields
(near‑mine) exploration, to secure a sustainable pipeline of
mineable ounces to underpin the Group’s cash generation
into the future at fluctuating gold prices

Australia GHANA

Mineral Mineral
Resources Reserves
Moz Au Moz Au
Mineral Mineral
3.5 1.8 St Ives Resources Reserves
Moz Au Moz Au
3.7 0.9 Granny Smith
Tarkwa 9.6 7.5
2.6 0.9 Agnew
Damang 5.3 1.2
0.3 0.1 Darlot
19.8 – FSE (Au)
9,921 – FSE (Mlb Cu)

Mineral Mineral Mineral Mineral


Resources Reserves Resources Reserves
Mineral Mineral
Moz Au Moz Au Mlb (Cu) Mlb (Cu)
Resources Reserves
Moz Au Moz Au Cerro Corona 3.0 1.8 1,006 623
76.0 38.0 South Deep Salares Norte 3.1
Woodjam 0.6 1,705

SOUTH
AFRICA AMERICAS

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Group overview 5

Strategic pillars

1 2 3
Operational
excellence

• Safe and productive teams


• Cost discipline in support of
sustainable cash generation
• No marginal mining – not ‘ounces
Growing
Gold Fields

• Prioritisation of low-risk, high-


return projects 
• Focus on higher-return assets in
regions where we already have
Securing
our future

• Attraction and retention of


critical employees
• Employee development
• Employee health
for ounces’ sake’ a presence • ‘Shared Value’
• To structure our business such • Growth of reserves per share • Stakeholder relations
that the Group will generate and cash flow per ounce and • Human rights and ethics
a 15% free cash flow margin per share • Environmental stewardship
at US$1,300/oz on an All-in Cost • Prioritisation of cash flow,
basis plus taxes profitability and return on
• A dividend-first policy – we pay investment – not ounces
out 25% to 35% of normalised • Active portfolio management
earnings ‘backing only the winners’

Gold Fields is a leading international unhedged gold mining Growing Gold Fields is about ensuring optimal All-in Cost (AIC)
company with eight operating mines spread across four margin, maximising earnings and returns to shareholders on
geographical regions: Australia, South Africa, the Americas and a per share and per ounce basis, in a sustainable manner,
West Africa. The Company has a robust production capability underpinned by a fit-for-purpose Mineral Reserve base that
based on high-quality, predominantly medium- to long-life assets provides flexibility and optionality. This requires a clear
and with the nature and size of its Mineral Reserve profile, understanding of each asset’s exploration potential, resource
remains one of the strongest in the industry. inventory and endowment to inform and drive appropriate
business plans and investment decisions.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
6 Group overview

Headline numbers1 
       

    MANAGED ATTRIBUTABLE
       

       

  Gold Mineral Resources 136.7Moz 113.4Moz


Copper Mineral Resources 14,038Mlb 7,120Mlb
December 2013
Gold Mineral Reserves 52.6Moz 48.6Moz
  Copper Mineral Reserves 712Mlb 708Mlb
  Gold production depletion from Mineral Resources 2.4Moz 2.3Moz
Copper production depletion from Mineral Resources 71Mlb 71Mlb
12 months
Gold production depletion from Mineral Reserves 2.3Moz 2.2Moz
  Copper production depletion from Mineral Reserves 71Mlb 71Mlb
  Gold Mineral Resources 128.2Moz 108.3Moz
December 2014 Copper Mineral Resources 13,666Mlb 6,873Mlb
Gold Mineral Reserves 52.1Moz 48.1Moz
  Copper Mineral Reserves 623Mlb 620Mlb
1
Group total figures and include Growth Projects.
31 December 2014 figures are net of production depletion.
31 December 2014 Mineral Reserve gold price of US$1,300/oz and copper price of US$3.0/lb.

Group Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve


overview
All numbers are net of 12 months’ depletion since the December 2013
statement, with the previous declared numbers shown in brackets.

Total attributable gold Mineral Resource, excluding The Mineral Reserves at the Ghanaian operations
growth projects, is 96.2 (100.0)Moz and Mineral increased from 8.3Moz to 8.7Moz post-depletion of
Reserve is 48.1 (48.6)Moz, net of 2.3Moz depletion. 0.7Moz, by virtue of increases at both Damang from
Total attributable copper Mineral Resource, excluding 1.1Moz to 1.2Moz and Tarkwa from 7.3Moz to 7.5Moz
growth projects, is 1,001 (1,119)Mlb and Mineral
Reserve is 620 (708)Mlb The Australia region Mineral Reserves decreased by
0.4Moz from 4.0Moz to 3.6Moz, however this is net of
Attributable gold Mineral Resources, including growth 1.0Moz from mined depletion. Granny Smith, Darlot
projects, are 108.3 (113.4)Moz, while attributable and Lawlers (the latter now fully incorporated in
copper Mineral Resources, including growth projects, Agnew) all declared a Mineral Resource and Mineral
are 6,873 (7,120)Mlb Reserve based on Gold Fields’ protocols and reporting
standards
The depleted Mineral Reserve ounces at South Deep
are 38.0 (38.2)Moz, with potential re-design and As Cerro Corona is TSF constrained, the Americas
scheduling required pending the completion of the region Mineral Reserves decreased from 2.0Moz to
geotechnical and strategic review of the operation. 1.8Moz and the copper Mineral Reserve from 712Mlb
Given the material influence of the broad spectrum of to 623Mlb due primarily to depletion
studies presently underway and the impact they can
potentially have on the mine design and planning at The Mineral Resources for the Arctic Platinum,
South Deep, it is deemed prudent to adopt a production Woodjam, Far Southeast and Salares Norte projects,
depletion model for this year’s Mineral Resource and have remained unchanged year-on-year
Mineral Reserve declaration. This approach ensures
The Yanfolila project in Mali with Mineral Resources of
that this year’s declaration does not invoke untested
1.5Moz gold and the Chucapaca project in Peru with a
and unconfirmed revisions to various technical inputs
Mineral Resource of 6.1Moz gold, 46.1Moz silver and
to the Life-of-Mine plan which could prove inaccurate
254Mlb copper were divested in 2014 
or potentially misleading 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Group overview 7

Assessment and reporting criteria


The assessment and reporting criteria as outlined in the 2007 audits are undertaken as and when required – targeting
SAMREC Code (as amended July 2009) have been used in the expert review, technical assurance and reporting compliance of
preparation of an internal Competent Persons report (CPR) for the key components of a mine’s Mineral Resource and Mineral
each operating asset, from which the numbers stated in this report Reserve, Life-of-Mine plan, key projects or significant maiden
have been drawn. The CPR principally comprises a technical Resource or Reserve declarations.
review of the Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves, together
with a techno-economic appraisal of the relevant mining and Technical and operating procedures that have been developed
processing assets. Reporting is also in accordance with Section are designed to be compliant with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act
12 of the JSE Listings Requirements and takes cognisance framework as adopted by GFI for Mineral Resource and Mineral
of other relevant international codes where geographically Reserve estimation, auditing and reporting.
applicable. The Competent Persons designated in terms of
The commodity prices used for the Mineral Reserve declaration
SAMREC who take responsibility for the reporting of Mineral
are in accordance with the SEC guidelines as the gold price
Resources and Mineral Reserves are the respective operation-
(US$1,300/oz) is lower than the three-year trailing average
based Mineral Resource Managers, Technical Managers and
(~US$1,450/oz). Although the gold price used is higher than the
relevant Project Managers. The Competent Persons have sufficient
current spot, our focus on strategically positioning the operations
experience relative to the type and style of mineral deposit under
to be cash generative underpins their resilience to gold prices
consideration and are full-time employees of Gold Fields (GFI).
periodically trading lower.
The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are underpinned
The prices used for the derivation of Mineral Resources
by appropriate Mineral Resource management processes
represent upside potential to that used for Mineral Reserves. The
and protocols that ensure adequate corporate governance.
December Mineral Resource prices have a premium of ~15%
External and independent third party reviews and
over the Mineral Reserve prices.

The following metal prices were used as a basis for estimation in the December 2014 declaration:

31 December 2014 31 December 2013


           

Commodity Unit Mineral Reserve Mineral Resource Mineral Reserve Mineral Resource

Gold US$/oz 1,300 1,500 1,300 1,500


  A$/oz 1,370 1,570 1,370 1,570
  ZAR/kg 420,000 480,000 400,000 460,000
Copper US$/tonne 6,610 7,720 6,610 7,720
  US$/lb 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.5
Note: See individual growth projects for respective metal prices used.

The table below shows the exchange rates used for planning
purposes, with the comparative rates used in 2013:
     
of a prefeasibility study level). Estimates of tonnages and
grades quoted as Mineral Reserves include allowances for
Exchange rate ZAR:US$ A$:US$
all mining dilution, all other mining factors (modifying factors)
and consequently are reported as net tonnes and grades
     

     

December 2014 10.00 1.05


delivered to the mill
December 2013 9.57 1.05
• The Group’s underground Mineral Reserves are deemed to
Mineral Resource tonnages and grades are estimated in‑situ be classified as being above existing infrastructure. This is in
over a minimum mining width, and include mineralisation line with international practice, where reserves are continually
below the selected cut-off grade to ensure that the Mineral accessed via ramps for which the planned expenditure has
Resources comprise practical mining blocks of adequate size been provided for in the LoM
and continuity. Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources • The LoM is produced following an annual Group Planning
are reported inclusive of those Mineral Resources modified to process that is initiated by reviewing a range of strategic
produce Mineral Reserves. options and scenarios, which are subject to trade-off studies
to identify the best value option per asset in alignment with
• Mineral Reserves are that portion of the Mineral Resource, Group strategy. This option then informs and guides the
which technical and economic studies have demonstrated, generation of the detailed operational plan, which is the first
can justify extraction at the time of disclosure (to a minimum year of the LoM plan and is prepared on a monthly basis and

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
8 Group overview

Assessment and reporting criteria (continued)

The Group zero-based costing is used to formulate the cash


flow model. The LoM plan is underpinned by a
commodity deposit such as Cerro Corona, the
net smelter return (NSR) cut-off calculation
has proven full mine design and production schedule. Of takes account of all cost and technical
critical importance is the utilisation of historically parameters
expertise in achieved data for productivity and processing • Mineral Reserves for West Africa are estimated
exploration, rates, modifying factors and operating costs using mine designs generated according
• Although all permitting may not be finalised, to industry standard mine optimisation
resource there is no reason to expect that these will not methods, current cost structures and technical

modelling, be granted based on existing processes and


protocols. However, the duration taken for final
assumptions derived from actual production
history and prefeasibility/feasibility studies
mine approval may impact the production schedules • Caution should be exercised when interpreting
• All financial models are based on existing tax the grade tonnage curves provided within this
planning and laws as at 31 December 2014 report. The ability to high-grade (selectively
reconciliation • Open-pit Mineral Resources are typically mine) the deposits may be precluded by the
confined to pit shells that are defined by the deposit geometry, mining method and the need
methodologies price, costs and relevant modifying factors used for practical development of the ore body

for surface, for their estimates. These pit shells are used
to constrain the mineralisation to that which is
• Operations are entitled to mine all declared
material located within their respective mineral
shallow and economically and practically extractable under rights and/or mining rights and all necessary
assumed economic conditions statutory mining authorisations and permits
deep to • All regions and operations have documented are in place or have reasonable expectation of
ultra-deep the assumptions and modifying factors that being granted
underpin the LoM plans, which are supported • Power and utility cost escalation has been
mining by mine designs and schedules. factored into all financial models

operations. • The December 2014 Mineral Resources and


Mineral Reserves for South Deep are estimated
• This Supplement (‘this report’) contains
information as at 31 December 2014
based on the December 2013 model and (‘the effective date of this report’). The
depleted for mining during the intervening statements and information set out in this report
12 months.1 The December 2013 Mineral speak only as of the effective date of this
Reserves were estimated using a total cost report. Shareholders and other interested and
(inclusive of sustaining capital, but excluding affected parties are therefore urged to review
project capital) cut-off grade, historical cost all public disclosures made by Gold Fields after
levels and mining efficiencies. The conversion the effective date of this report, as some of the
ratio from Mineral Resources to Mineral information contained in the report may have
Reserves at South Deep is further affected by changed or have been updated. Gold Fields
the following key factors: does not undertake any obligation to update
– The exclusion from Mineral Reserves publicly or release any revisions to statements
of regional support and safety pillars as and information set out in this report. Neither is
designed and set out in the current mine plan it obligated to reflect events or circumstances
– Mining constraints applied to the extraction, after the effective date of this report or to reflect
based on the geometry of the geological the occurrence of unanticipated events, unless
structures as presently interpreted obliged to do so pursuant to law or regulation.
– Mining quality factors (e.g. mine call factor In such event, Gold Fields does not undertake
and dilution) to refer back to any information contained in
• Mineral Reserve parameters for the Australia this report.
region vary on a mining project-by-project basis,
and reflect specific cost structures and technical The Group has proven expertise in exploration,
assumptions derived from actual production resource modelling, mine planning and
history or prefeasibility/feasibility work reconciliation methodologies for surface, shallow
• Due to the limited extent of the Cerro Corona and deep to ultra-deep mining operations. It
mining right area, Mineral Resources are limited constantly reviews and considers the application
by the current capacity of the waste storage of international leading practices in Mineral
facility (WSF), while the Mineral Reserves are Resource management at all its operations and
constrained by the present capacity of the projects.
tailings storage facility (TSF). In a multiple  Refer to page 97 for details on rationale to deplete the 2013 model.
1

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Group overview 9

Summary of the Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement as at 31 December 20141

Headline numbers 
Mineral Resources  Mineral Reserves
                 

31 Dec 2014  31 Dec 2013 31 Dec 2014  31 Dec 2013

  Tonnes Grade Au Au Tonnes Grade Au Au


Total operating mines – Gold only (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz) (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz)
Managed 903.9 3.58 103.925 107.957 558.1 2.90 52.123 52.564
Attributable 837.6 3.57 96.187 100.048 514.7 2.91 48.122 48.609
Total operating mines and
projects – Au only                
Managed 2,068.6 1.93 128.196 136.662 558.1 2.90 52.123 52.564
Attributable 1,447.1 2.33 108.291 113.392 514.7 2.91 48.122 48.609

Operational summary1, 3 
  Mineral Resources (100%)  Mineral Reserves (100%)  Attributable R&R (%)
                       

  31 Dec 2014  31 Dec 2013 31 Dec 2014 31 Dec 2013 31 Dec 2014
  Tonnes Grade Gold  Gold Tonnes Grade Gold  Gold Resource Reserve
GOLD (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz) (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz) (%) (Moz) (Moz)
Australia operations                       
Agnew  13.8 5.79 2.570 3.657 3.6 7.44 0.865 0.953 100 2.570 0.865
Darlot  1.1 7.18 0.263 0.271 0.4 7.36 0.085 0.155 100 0.263 0.085
Granny Smith  17.4 6.61 3.696 3.254 4.5 6.02 0.872 0.838 100 3.696 0.872
St Ives 30.1 3.63 3.508 4.340 17.8 3.14 1.803 2.022 100 3.508 1.803
Total Australia region 62.4 5.00 10.037 11.521 26.3 4.28 3.625 3.968 100 10.037 3.625
South African operation                      
South Deep2 382.4 6.19 76.046 76.249 223.2 5.30 38.016 38.224 91.8 69.804 34.896
Total South Africa region 382.4 6.19 76.046 76.249 223.2 5.30 38.016 38.224  91.8 69.804 34.896
Peru operation                      
Cerro Corona 115.2 0.81 3.015 3.318 60.5 0.90 1.757 2.025 99.5 3.001 1.749
Total Americas region 115.2 0.81 3.015 3.318 60.5 0.90 1.757 2.025 99.5 3.001 1.749
Ghana operations                      
Damang 85.3 1.92 5.260 6.579 25.7 1.49 1.235 1.073 90 4.734 1.111
Tarkwa 258.7 1.15 9.568 10.291 222.4 1.05 7.491 7.273 90 8.611 6.742
Total West Africa region 344.0 1.34 14.827 16.870 248.1 1.09 8.725 8.346 90 13.345 7.853
GOLD ONLY                      
Total Gold Managed 903.9 3.58 103.925 107.957 558.1 2.90 52.123 52.564      
Total Gold attributable 837.6 3.57 96.187 100.048 514.7 2.91 48.122 48.608   96.187 48.122
COPPER Tonnes Grade Copper Copper Tonnes Grade Copper  Copper   Copper  Copper
(Peru) – Cerro Corona (Mt) (% Cu) (Mlb) (Mlb) (Mt) (% Cu) (Mlb) (Mlb) % (Mlb) (Mlb)
Copper (Cu) only 108.0 0.42 1,006 1,124 60.5 0.47 623 712 99.5 1,001 620
1
Managed unless otherwise stated.
2
Mineral Reserves are reported at head grade inclusive of ore and in-section waste tonnes, while the capital waste component is excluded. 
3
Refer to the relevant mines for the historic grade and tonnage information.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
10 Group overview

Assessment and reporting criteria (continued)

Project summary
  Mineral Resource Mineral Resource
     

  31 Dec 2014   Dec 2013 31 Dec 2014

Total projects   Tonnes Grade     Attributable metal


All metals (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz) % (Moz)

Total – Gold 1,164.6 0.65 24.271 28.705 50 12.104 


Total – Platinum 208.5 0.36 2.417 2.417 100 2.417 
Total – Palladium 208.5 1.47 9.842 9.842 100 9.842 
Total – Silver 23.3 44.80 33.600 46.093 100 33.600 
    Cu/Ni (%) Cu/Ni (Mlb)   Cu/Ni (Mlb)

Total – Copper 1,363.0 0.42 12,660 12 914 46 5,872


Total – Nickel 208.5 0.10 438 438 100 438

Projects are inclusive of FSE, Salares Norte, Woodjam and APP 

Mineral Resource change per region (Moz)

(4.43)
Growth projects 28.70
24.27

(0.30)
Americas region 3.32
3.02

(1.48)
Australia region 11.52
10.04

(2.04)
West Africa region 16.87
14.83

(0.20)
South Africa region 76.25
76.05

(20) 0 20 40 60 80 100

Variance Dec 2013 Dec 2014

Mineral Reserve change per region (Moz)

(0.27)
Americas region
2.03
1.76

(0.34)
Australia region 3.97
3.63

0.38
West Africa region 8.35
8.73

(0.21)
South Africa region 38.22
38.02

(5) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

The charts above depict the Group’s comparative (2014 vs. 2013) managed gold Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve ounces split
by region and growth projects.

• The Growth projects account for 19% of the total 2014 gold Mineral Resource base
• The production profile in 2014 was derived from Ghana (~32%), Australia (~45%), South America (~14% including copper as
Au‑equivalents) and South Africa (~9%)
• The 2014 figures are net of 2.3Moz production depletion

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Group overview 11

Annual change in gold Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves 


The tables below depict the annual movements in the managed Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves:

RANKED OPERATIONS GOLD MANAGED RESOURCES (Moz) 


                 

      Cerro   Granny     South


OPERATIONS Darlot Agnew Corona St Ives Smith Damang Tarkwa Deep
                 

                 

Dec 2014 0.26 2.57 3.02 3.51 3.70 5.26 9.57 76.05
Dec 2013 0.27 3.66 3.32 4.34 3.25 6.58 10.29 76.25
Variance (0.01) (1.09) (0.30) (0.83) 0.44 (1.32) (0.72) (0.20)

RANKED PROJECTS GOLD MANAGED RESOURCES (Moz)1


             

          Salares
PROJECTS Chucapaca  Yanfolila Woodjam APP Norte FSE
             

             

Dec 2014 – – 0.58 0.79 3.10 19.80


Dec 2013 6.07 1.46 0.58 0.79 – 19.80
Variance (6.07) (1.46) – – 3.10 –
1
  Project Mineral Resource models unchanged year-on-year

COPPER – OPERATIONS ONLY (Mlb) 


     

Cerro Corona Resource Reserve


     

     

Dec 2014 1 006 623


Dec 2013 1 124 712
Variance (118) (89)

Key year-on-year changes in Mineral Resources were driven by


mining depletion, with other notable changes indicated below: 

Yanfolila and Chucapaca – divested in 2014; Woodjam


and APP unchanged and earmarked for disposal

Granny Smith, Lawlers and Darlot – acquisitions in


2013, now embedded in the Australia region with
the Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves now
declared using GFI process, protocols and reporting
standards; resource growth at Wallaby underground,
Granny Smith

Agnew – resource modelling and discovery, principally


at FBH-Link

St Ives – offset by discovery, mainly at Invincible and


nominally at Athena 

Damang – higher mining unit costs (due to lower


tonnes mined) and resource modelling 

Tarkwa – increasing mining costs (also due to lower


tonnes mined), changes in Resource models and the
inclusion of the Teberebie pillar 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
12 Group overview

Assessment and reporting criteria (continued)

RANKED OPERATIONS GOLD MANAGED RESERVES (Moz)         


                 

       Granny    Cerro      South


OPERATIONS Darlot Agnew Smith Damang Corona St Ives Tarkwa Deep
                 

                 

Dec 2014 0.09 0.87 0.87 1.24 1.76  1.80  7.49  38.02 
Dec 2013 0.15 0.95 0.84 1.07 2.03  2.02  7.27  38.22 
Variance (0.07) (0.09) 0.03 0.17 (0.27) (0.22) 0.22 (0.21)

Key year-on-year changes in Mineral Reserves were driven by mining depletion, with other notable changes indicated below:

Granny Smith, Lawlers and Darlot – acquisitions in 2013, now embedded in the Australia region, Lawlers amalgamated
with Agnew

Agnew – discovery at the FBH lodes offset by a lack of Resource conversion, modelling revisions and increased costs with
increasing depth of mining at Kim ore body

St Ives – offset by discovery, mainly at Invincible and nominally at Athena

Tarkwa – increasing mining costs and changes in Resource models and the inclusion of the Teberebie pillar, additional
resource conversion and lower cut-off grades 

Damang – lower cut-off grade, increased MCF (from 89% to 92%) and inclusion of additional ounces at Huni cut back 2,
Amoanda and DPCB 1 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Group overview 13

Operations exploration and QA/QC


Gold Fields believes that near-mine exploration offers the best The near-mine exploration for the twelve months to December
route to low cost, low risk growth that can generate cash in 2014 centred heavily on the Australia region (US$54.4 million)
the short and medium term. In 2014, Gold Fields raised its and the West Africa region (US$4.0 million) where strong growth
near-mine exploration expenditure by 72% to US$60 million potential exists. An infill-drilling programme was conducted at
(2013: US$35 million) in pursuit of this strategy. This expenditure Cerro Corona in the Americas region, and 2,572 metres were
supported a total of 349,511 metres of near-mine drilling drilled at a cost of US$1.0 million. The underground long inclined
(2013: 250,158 metres). borehole (LIB) drilling programme continued from 100 2W into
Corridor 1 at South Deep (3,295 metres at US$0.6 million).
The focus on and around existing mine infrastructure is to ensure
that the Mineral Reserve replacement and expansion pipeline is The total exploration metres drilled and expenditure for the
maintained, and the timeous conversion of Mineral Resources to 12-month period ending 31 December 2014 are summarised
Mineral Reserves is leveraged. below with the December 2013 expenditure added for
comparison. The cost per metre drilled may vary considerably,
A wide-ranging quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) depending on type of drilling, depth of drilling, mobilisation and
protocol is in place at all the Gold Fields operations and projects, de-mobilisation, ground conditions, as well as assay costs.
using leading industry practice in data acquisition, reputable
certified laboratories and comprehensive analytical controls.

Exploration drilling and expenditure


  December 2014 December 2013
     

  Metres drilled ZAR (millions) A$ (millions) US$ (millions) Metres drilled US$ (millions)

Region            
Australia 317,489    60.495  54.45  219,971 28.95
South Africa 3,295  6.153    0.57  9,983 2.81
South America 2,572      1.04  – –
West Africa 26,155      4.00  20,204 3.11
Total Gold Fields 349,511      60.06  250,158 34.87
December 2014 exchange rates: ZAR10.82 = US$1.0 and US$1.0 = A$1.11. All mines exclusive of non-capex grade control and cover drilling.
Details per operation are in the respective regional sections.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
2.1

2.2
Americas region (Cerro Corona and projects –
Salares Norte and Woodjam)

Australia region (Agnew, Darlot, Granny Smith,


16

34
2
operations and projects

St Ives plus FSE Project)

2.3 South Africa region (South Deep) 86

2.4 West Africa region (Damang and Tarkwa) 102

2.5 Corporate Development project (Arctic 128


Platinum (APP))
2.1 Americas region

The Americas region is anchored


by the standout Cerro Corona mine
delivering excellent free cash flow
margins and the Salares Norte
exploration project continues to
show favourable results  Cerro Corona
(Peru)

The Americas region currently Operations (Cerro Corona):

accounts for 3% of the gold Mineral Resources

Mineral Resource and 3%


of the gold Mineral Reserve
3.0Moz gold and
base, excluding growth 1,006Mlb copper
projects.
Mineral Reserves 

1.8Moz gold and


623Mlb copper 
The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 17

• Strong anchor point for cementing cash flow and growth within the
region
• Two new Jaw crusher’s installed to facilitate SAG mill throughput
rates as rock hardness increases
• Prefeasibility work in progress to assess the potential to add
additional reserves based on TSF expansion and WSF capacity
opportunities
• Options to process the oxide stockpiles are being investigated CANADA
• 2,572m of infill-drilling and 66km of re-logging was completed in
2014 increasing knowledge of the ore body at depth (hypogene
alteration, clay, density, alteration, hardness and silicification),
which will enhance the 2015 Mineral Resource model
• Life-of-Mine extends to 2023 (nine years)
• 99.5% attributable to Gold Fields

Projects (Mineral Resources only)


Woodjam (Canada)

0.6Moz gold and


1,705Mlb copper
PERU
51% attributable to Lima
Gold Fields 
Salares Norte (Chile) 
CHILE
3.1Moz gold and
33.6Moz silver
100% attributable to
Gold Fields

   

  Operational profile (Cerro Corona)


   

   

Mining method Open-pit


Infrastructure One open-pit. One standard sulphide flotation plant with a capacity of 6.7Mtpa
Mineralisation style Porphyry (Cu-Au)
Mineralisation characteristics i. Mineralisation hosted by a sub-vertical cylindrical shaped diorite porphyry;
ii. Confined to well-defined intrusive body; and
iii. Mineralisation zones discontinuous with mid-range predictability.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
18 Regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Strong Regional overview  The regional structure is characterised by large


open folds of Cretaceous-aged sedimentary
anchor The Cerro Corona mine is located in northern Peru
on the eastern slope of the western mountain
units, predominately limestones, with axial planes
striking approximately 315° and steep south-west
point for range of the Andes. The copper-gold deposit
dips. Faulting is generally restricted to normal and
exhibits a typical porphyry style of mineralisation
cementing and is situated within the Hualgayoc mining
oblique slip faults with offsets of a few metres to a
few tens of metres.
cash flow district in the northern part of the Cajamarca
province. This metallogenic province hosts prolific Exploration drilling and expenditure
and growth epithermal, porphyry and polymetallic style
The Cerro Corona Mineral Resource is defined
within the mineralisation. The mining area is characterised
by moderate to reasonably steep mountainous
by approximately 92km of exploration drilling.
Towards the end of 2014, Gold Fields La Cima
region terrain with elevations ranging from approximately
(GFLC) had drilled 2,572m of  diamond drill core in
3,600 to 4,000 metres above mean sea level.
order to increase the confidence in the definition
of the lithological contacts and reduce local
Regional geology
variability related to grade distribution within the
The Cerro Corona copper-gold porphyry is one
five-year mine plan. At the same time, a major
of 14 known Tertiary aged porphyry Cu-Au-Mo
re‑logging programme was completed late in
deposits and 19 epithermal Au-Ag deposits
2014, as part of the geo-metallurgy project.
located in the Cajamarca metallogenic province
Around 66km, including core and chips samples,
(CMP) of northern Peru. There are two well-
were re-logged during this exercise.
mineralised districts within the CMP. These are the
Yanacocha district in the south of the province, The results of this recent drilling and the re‑logging
which is host to what was the largest producing programme will be included in the 2015 Mineral
gold mine in South America. The other is the Resource estimation. This will improve the model
Hualgayoc mining district in the north, which is domaining, resulting in higher resolution for
one of the oldest mining districts in Peru and is improved mining selectivity.
best known historically for its past silver production
and more recent base metal production. In accordance with the SAMREC 2007 Code,
the Americas region maintains rigorous QA/
This well-known district has been an important QC protocols on all its exploration programmes.
silver producing area since Inca times, with more It draws on industry leading practice for data
than 50Moz of  silver and significant amounts of acquisition and utilises accredited laboratories
lead, zinc and copper produced from vein and which are regularly reviewed both internally and
manto-type deposits since the Spanish conquest externally. Analytical QA/QC is maintained and
in the 16th century. The Hualgayoc mining town monitored through the submission of blanks,
was established in 1771. certified reference material and duplicates plus
umpire laboratory checks.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 19

West-east section through the Cerro Corona intrusion showing interpreted geological domains
Elev (Z)

+3 950

+3 900

Geological domains
+3 850
Oxide
+3 800 Mixed
Supergene
+3 750 Hypogene
Barren Diorite
+3 700 Cretaceous sediments

+3 650 View looking north

+3 600

+3 550

+3 500
0 50 100 150
763 000

763 100

763 200

763 300

763 400

763 500

763 600

763 700

East (Y)
EXPLORATION DRILLING Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12
       

Metres US$ Metres US$ Metres US$


Operation drilled (millions) drilled (millions) drilled (millions)

Cerro Corona 2,572 1.04 – – 6,713 2.79

Social licence to operate  In line with a well-entrenched sustainable development and


community engagement policy, the operation has invested
Since 2011, GFLC has been certified in accordance with the
heavily in local community development and responsible
ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001:2007 standards. In this
environmental management. As part of this strategy, GFLC is
respect GFLC established an integrated Safety, Occupational
also implementing two Shared Value projects, the first of which is
Health and Environmental Management System at Cerro Corona,
to improve the supply of potable water to local communities and
which subscribes to international best practices and Peruvian
to work in collaboration with multiple stakeholders to remediate
legal requirements.
legacy mining sites (not associated with Gold Fields operations)
In August 2014, an annual external audit of the system was that are contaminating a local river. The second is to enhance
completed at Cerro Corona and the auditors recommended local procurement, which will facilitate increased community
that the mine maintain certification to ISO 14001:2004 and employment and local enterprise development. 
OHSAS 18001:2007. 

In 2014, Cerro Corona started a Behaviour-based Safety


Programme with the intention of reinforcing a culture of safety
for all employees and contractors. This programme will be
completed in 2015.

           

Total
Recordable CO2
Fatal Injury Injury Energy emissions Water
Frequency Frequency consumption (000 tonnes) withdrawal
Sustainability factors Rate Rate (TJ) (Scope 1 + 2) (million litres)
           

           

C2014 – 0.38 877 60.6 3,561


Cerro Corona
C2013 0.17 0.34 1,010 70.3 3,625

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
20 regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Cerro Corona Mine


www.goldfields.com

Cerro Corona consistently produces high-margin gold and copper from a single large open-pit.

It is located in the highest part of the western Cordillera of the Andes Mountains in northern Peru.

GENERAL LOCATION

The Cerro Corona deposit, centred at longitude 78° 37’ W and latitude 6° 45’ S, is located 1.5km west-northwest of the village of
Hualgayoc, some 80km by road north of the departmental capital of Cajamarca, and approximately 600km north-northwest of the
capital city of Lima.

Asset fundamentals  
The mining concessions owned by Cerro Corona cover an area of 4,379.3 hectares
LICENCE STATUS AND (1,614.62 hectares additional in 2014 from the dissolved JV with Consolidada de Hualgayoc),
HOLDINGS while the surface rights cover 1,244 hectares. Cerro  Corona is owned by Gold Fields La Cima
S.A. (GFLC), which holds 99.53% of the economic interest.

Cerro Corona Mine operates one open-pit operation and one copper-gold plant at elevations
ranging from approximately 3,600 to 4,000 metres above mean sea level.
The processing plant at Cerro Corona includes the typical equipment for a copper flotation plant,
with a design capacity of 6.7Mtpa. The crushing plant comprises two jaw crushers in parallel.
Crushed product is conveyed to a two-stage grinding circuit consisting of a SAG mill and a ball
OPERATIONAL mill, in closed circuit with cyclones for classification. Cyclone overflow represents the final milled
INFRASTRUCTURE AND product and feeds the flotation plant. The rougher flotation produces a bulk concentrate, which
MINERAL PROCESSING is then reground and sent to the cleaner flotation. The tails go to scavenger flotation while the
concentrate with a grade of over 20% of copper goes to the next process.
The final concentrate is thickened and filtered before being stockpiled for final shipment by road to
the Salaverry port (380km), for shipment to copper smelters in Korea and Germany. The thickened
rougher flotation tails and the tails from the cleaner-scavenger flotation are sent by gravity to the
tailings storage facility.

CLIMATE There are no extreme climate conditions that may affect mining operations.

The Cerro Corona copper-gold deposit is typical of porphyry style mineralisation comprising stock
DEPOSIT TYPE work quartz-pyrite-marcasite-chalcopyrite ± bornite ± hematite ± magnetite veining, hosted by
intensely altered intrusive lithologies of diorite to dacitic composition.

LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM) It is estimated that the current Mineral Reserve will be depleted in 2023 (nine years).

In August 2014 the Integrated Safety, Occupational Health and Environment Management System
ENVIRONMENTAL/
completed the annual external audit of this system. Cerro Corona subsequently retained the
HEALTH AND SAFETY
ISO 14001:2004 – OHSAS 18001:2007 certificate. No fatalities were recorded during 2014.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 21

Brief history of Cerro Corona  Key developments at Cerro Corona


In 1979, exploration identified porphyry-style mineralisation in • Remained the lowest cost (AIC/oz) producer in Gold Fields,
the Cerro Corona area. In the period 1992 to 1993, sampling by producing high-margin gold and copper.
the Gubbins Group identified gold mineralisation in the leached • A 66km re-logging programme was completed as part of
cap of the Cerro Corona deposit. Copper-gold porphyry the geo-metallurgy project, which will increase the overall
mineralisation was discovered through drilling of nine diamond definition of the lithological contacts and increase knowledge
core holes and completion of an exploration adit into the of the ore body at depth including hypogene alteration,
mineralised zone. clay, density, rock hardness and silicification. This will
improve metallurgical response modelling for the deeper
From 1994 to 1996 Cerro Corona, then held by Barrick, drilled sections of the hypogene ore body.
140 reverse circulation drill holes totalling 9,476 metres and • In July 2014, two new mobile jaw crushers were installed
118 diamond core holes totalling 35,254 metres. A draft to facilitate the delivery of six-inch material to the semi-
feasibility study was completed by Kilborn. From 1997 to autogenous grinding (SAG) mill. This will assist plant
1998, RGC Limited drilled six diamond core holes totalling throughput with increasing hardness of the ore as mining from
2,760 metres and a preliminary feasibility study was completed the pit goes deeper.
by Fluor. • A prefeasibility study has been launched to determine if the
prevailing TSF constraint (at RL 3,800m wall height) on the
In 2001, Minproc completed a number of feasibility studies,
Mineral Reserves can be lifted and allow for the placement
which ultimately indicated a Mineral Reserve of ~95Mt. In
of additional tailing material over the LoM. The study builds
2003, Gold Fields, through a subsidiary, signed a definitive
on previous work by incorporating the latest design updates
agreement with Sociedad Minera Corona S.A. for the purchase
for the TSF including optimisation of the mine in the potential
of the Cerro Corona deposit and adjoining mining concessions.
expanded case, as well as the assessment of additional new
The environmental impact assessment was approved on opportunities.
2 December 2005 and the purchase transaction for the • The option to process the oxide stockpiles through the
Cerro Corona Project was completed in January 2006. Mine current sulphide plant is under review, both separately and
construction commenced in May 2006. Building of the Las in conjunction with sulphides. During 2014 a number of
Gordas tailings dam and quarrying for the relevant construction laboratory tests were performed with a mixture of material
material commenced in 2007. The mine started production in from the upper part of oxide stockpile N°2 and hypogene
September 2008, when the process plant started to operate. mineralisation from the pit. Additional studies with respect
to treating the oxide stockpiles will be conducted in 2015,
Gold Fields Corona (BVI) Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary including the completion of the flotation test work.
of Gold Fields Limited (GFL), increased its economic interest • Energy is being supplied by Kallpa until 2017. A new and
in Gold Fields La Cima S.A. from the original 80% to 98.6% in competitive arrangement has been signed with Kallpa for
2012 and in 2013 to 99.53%. security of energy supply to 2027.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
22 Regions, operations and projects

759000 E

760000 E

762000 E

764000 E
763000 E
761000 E
N ive
r
R
go
Tin es
on
nc
Pila
To

To
Ta
nta
hu
at
ay
Rhyolite East LVU
Oxide Stockpile No. 1
Arpon Mine Office
9253000 N 9253000 N
Qda
El P Facilities WSF
uen Las Aguilas LVU
te D Las Gordas LVU
e La
Hie La Hierba East LVU Sylvita
rba Concession
Las Gordas Dam Facilities quarry
RCB
La Hierba West LVU Las Aguilas
Dam
La Hierba TSF
Dam UCB Cerro Corona
Sulphide
Stockpile Open-pit
9252000 N Existing Camp 9252000 N
Las Gordas RoM HUALGAYOC
Waste Dump Pad
S

SCB
CHCB Metallurgical Plant

r
ve
Topsoil Stockpile Ri
Chorro #10 oc
Blanco ay
a lg
WSF Hu
Entrance 9251000 N
9251000 N Gate

Permanent Camp Oxide Stockpile No. 2

rca
ma
C aja
To

9250000 N 9250000 N

Cuadratura Quarry

Caneria Quarry

PLAN SHOWING CERRO CORONA MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014

0 1

Kilometre
Provisional South American datum 56
759000 E

760000 E

763000 E

764000 E
761000 E

762000 E

Reference
Office Tailings Dam
Rivers Waste dumps
Roads Quarry
Powerline Topsoil dump
Project boundary Blankets
Open-pit Oxide Stockpile

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 23

Cerro Corona Mine (continued)

Operating Statistics
  Historic performance
         

C2014 C2013 C2012 C2011

Open-pit mining          
Total mined kt 13,603 14,793 14,006 12,591
– Waste mined kt 6,571 6,435 6,296 6,007
– Sulphide tonnes mined kt 7,032 8,359 7,710 6,584
Strip ratio (waste: ore tonnes) ratio 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.9
Gold mined grade g/t 1.08 1.02 1.12 1.13
Copper mined grade % 0.56 0.48 0.60 0.69
Processing          
Sulphide tonnes milled kt 6,797 6,571 6,513 6,593
Gold head grade g/t 1.06 1.13 1.24 1.22
Copper head grade % 0.58 0.55 0.68 0.74
Produced          
Concentrate produced kt 164 151 181 190
Gold produced koz 151 159 170 161
Copper produced kt 32 30 36 39
Plant Recovery (Au) % 68.0 69.4 68.3 65.0
Plant Recovery (Cu) % 85.5 86.3 85.5 83.0
Financials          
US$ m 158 161 171 157
Operating cost
US$/oz 484 509 501 411
US$ m 51 56 94 69
Capital expenditure
US$/oz 156 178 272 181
All-in Cost (AIC)  US$/oz 316 206    
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC)1, 2 US$/oz 316 206 775 592
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 60.5 67.1 103.6 110
Mineral Reserves Au head grade g/t 0.90 0.94 0.83 0.87
Mineral Reserves Cu head grade % 0.47 0.48 0.45 0.46
Mineral Reserves – Au Moz 1.8 2.0 2.8 3.1
Mineral Reserves – Cu Mlb 623 712 1,039 1,126
1
Pre-December 2013 figures represent notional cash expenditure (NCE) US$/oz.
2
AISC and AIC calculated according to WGC standard, with copper revenue treated as a by-product. Rounding off of figures presented in this report may result in minor
computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
24 Regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Local geology Mining


The Cerro Corona copper-gold deposit is hosted by a 600 to The Cerro Corona deposit is mined by conventional surface
700 metre diameter sub-vertical, cylindrical-shaped diorite open-pit mining methods. The final surface mine area is
porphyry emplaced in mid-Cretaceous limestone, marls expected to cover some 900 by 1,000 metres. The mining
and siliciclastic rocks. Within the porphyry, the copper-gold operation will extend from the crest of the original Cerro Corona
mineralisation is primarily associated with zones of stock hill, which peaked at 3,964mRL, to a final depth at around
work quartz veining conforming to classic porphyry-type vein 3,570mRL. 
definition. The Cerro Corona porphyry is unusual in that it carries
a very high gold content compared to other copper-gold Mining methods
deposits. The Cerro Corona pit is mined via open cut methods by
conventional drill and blast with a truck and excavator fleet. Load
There are at least two phases of diorite placement, only one of and haul is carried out by 36 tonne dump trucks and excavators
which is mineralised. The non-mineralised diorite is generally with a 9 tonne bucket capacity. Mining benches are all 10m high
regarded as the last event, and is referred to as ‘barren core’. and haul roads have a maximum gradient of 10%.
Most recent geological modelling strongly suggests that the
Cerro Corona porphyry probably comprises four or five satellite All the material requires drill and blast with varying powder
stocks, the last two of which are barren. Early mineralisation was factors according to rock hardness, using a 200mm blast hole
accompanied by moderate to strong potassic alteration, which diameter.
has been commonly overprinted by late, semi-pervasive argillic
Mine planning and scheduling
alteration and locally, by structurally controlled phyllic alteration
assemblages (quartz-sericite-pyrite). Cerro Corona’s LoM plan is based on detailed and well informed
geological and resource models. The LoM plan is established
The intrusion has been emplaced at the intersection of Andean from detailed short and long-term mine design and schedules
parallel and Andean-normal (transandean) structures, which based on high confidence production rates and well defined
is a typical feature of the Cajamarca metallogenic province. modifying factors. Planning utilises specialised mine planning
A dominant northeast-southwest trending fault system, running software and a customised resource estimation model known as
through the intrusion, is referred to as the Mariela Fault trend, the localised multivariate uniform conditioning model (LMUC),
which has an important relationship in the distribution of the which uses specialised geostatistical software.
mineralisation. There are three distinct mineralised zones within
the deposit. These are identified as the annulus zone, the
northern zone and the southern zone. Each of these is treated
separately in geological and resource modelling.

In addition to the mineralised zones, the deposit is characterised


by several domains conforming to the degree of oxidation
and weathering. Supergene oxidation and leaching processes
at Cerro Corona have led to the development of a weak to
moderate copper enrichment blanket. This allows for the
subdivision of the deposit from the surface downward, into
an oxide zone, a mixed oxide-sulphide zone, a secondary
enriched (supergene) sulphide zone and a primary (hypogene)
sulphide zone.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 25

Cerro Corona Mine (continued)

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves Mineral Resources


Mineral Resources are reported  as in situ within pit shells and
Geological and evaluation models have been updated as
are inclusive of those Mineral Resources, which have been
at December 2014 to reflect the latest available data sets.
modified to produce Mineral Reserves. The Measured, Indicated
An integrated mine design and schedule, based on current
and Inferred oxide and sulphide Mineral Resource estimate has
performance levels, takes cognisance of the inherent risks
been calculated within the diorite intrusion.
associated with mining operations at Cerro Corona.

Both onsite and commercial laboratories are used for assay


The Mineral Resources are reported at an NSR cut-off
and rigorous quality assurance and quality control QA/QC
of US$18.47/t and the Mineral Reserves at NSR cut-offs
protocols are in place, including external audits by independent
ranging from US$18.47 to US$25.0/t, from the LMUC model
consultants.
and constrained within an optimised MineSight® Economic
Planner pit shell, based on the relevant economic parameters.
The Mineral Reserves are constrained by the total capacity
of the upgraded tailing storage facility of 100 million tonnes
(60.5 million tonnes post-December 2014).

GOLD MINERAL RESOURCE CLASSIFICATION


Tonnes (Mt) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
       

Gold classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit                  
Measured 76.1 85.9 90.3 0.82 0.83 0.84 2,011 2,296 2,437
Indicated 26.6 28.7 45.9 0.68 0.68 0.61 578 625 893
Inferred 1.4 – 1.1 0.47 – 0.36 22 – 12
104.2 114.6 137.3 0.78 0.79 0.76 2,611 2,921 3,342
Surface stockpiles                  
Oxides Measured 7.2 6.8 6.7 1.32 1.34 1.35 303 295 292
Sulphide Measured 3.8 3.9 2.1 0.82 0.83 0.99 101 102 68
Total surface stockpiles 11.0 10.7 8.9 1.14 1.16 1.26 405 398 360
Grand total 115.2 125.3 146.2 0.81 0.82 0.79 3,015 3,318 3,702

COPPER MINERAL RESOURCE CLASSIFICATION


  Tonnes (Mt) Grade (%) Copper (Mlb)
       

Copper classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit                  
Measured 76.1 85.8 90.2 0.43 0.44 0.45 725 836 886
Indicated 26.6 28.6 45.5 0.41 0.41 0.39 242 260 389
Inferred 1.4 – 1.0 0.34 – 0.35 11 – 8
Total open-pit 104.2 114.5 136.7 0.43 0.43 0.43 978 1,096 1,282
Surface stockpiles                  
Measured 3.8 3.9 2.1 0.33 0.33 0.42 28 28 20
Total surface stockpiles 3.8 3.9 2.1 0.33 0.33 0.42 28 28 20
Grand total 108.0 118.3 138.8 0.42 0.43 0.43 1,006 1,124 1,302

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
26 Regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Modifying factors • All Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades and
• Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are quoted at an tonnages, as delivered to the metallurgical processing facility
appropriate economic NSR** cut-off, with tonnages and • Mineral Reserve statements include only Measured and
grades based on the resource block model. They also include Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral
estimates of any material below the NSR cut-off that needs Reserves as contained in the LoM plan
to be mined in order to extract the complete pay portion of • Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo internal
the Resource audits during the year and any issues identified are rectified
• Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are quoted as at at the earliest opportunity – usually during the current
31 December 2014 reporting cycle
• Unless otherwise stated, all Mineral Resources and Mineral
Reserves are quoted as 100% and are not attributable with
respect to ownership

     December December December


   Units 2014 2013 2012
Mineral Resource parameters        
Mineral Resource gold price US$/oz 1,500 1,500 1,650
Mineral Resource copper price US$/lb 3.50 3.50 3.90
Au Cut-off for oxide ore g/t 0.4 0.4 0.4
Net Smelter Return US$/t 18.47 19.04 18.46
Mineral Reserve parameters        
Mineral Reserve gold price US$/oz 1,300 1,300 1,500
Mineral Reserve copper price US$/lb 3.0 3.0 3.5
NSR for Mill Feed US$/t 18.5 – 25.0 21.4 18.46
Strip ratio (waste:ore) ratio 0.89 0.73 0.81
Dilution open-pit % 0  0 0
MCF % 100 100 100
Mining recovery factor (open-pit) % 100 100 100
Net Smelter Return US$/t 18.47 21.4 18.46
Plant recovery factor (Au) – Mixed % 51 51 51
Plant recovery factor (Cu) – Mixed % 56 69 65
Plant recovery factor (Au) – Supergene* % 68 67 66
Plant recovery factor (Cu) – Supergene* % 80 84 85
Plant recovery factor (Au) – Hypogene % 70 68 70
Plant recovery factor (Cu) – Hypogene % 89 87 88
Processing capacity Mtpa 6.7 6.7 6.7
*  At December 2014 approximately 99% of remaining in-pit ore consists of hypogene material.
**Net smelter return (NSR) is defined as the return from sales of concentrates, expressed in US$/t, i.e.: NSR = (Au price – Au selling cost) x Au grade x Au recovery + (Cu price –
Cu selling cost) x Cu grade x Cu recovery. In 2014 a variable NSR was applied to the LoM plan to optimise the NPV and FCF.

Grade tonnage curve 


Grade tonnage curves for Sulphide Mineral Resources are presented below.

Grade tonnage curve (sulphides) − Surface


Average grade above cut-off Au (g/t), Cu (%)

160 0.9
140 0.8
120 0.7
Tonnes (millions)

0.6
100
0.5
80
0.4
60
0.3
40 0.2 Tonnes above cut-off (millions)
20 0.1 Average gold grade above cut-off (g/t)
Average copper grade above cut-off (%)
0 0.0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

Cut-off grade (US$/t NSR)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 27

Cerro Corona Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves The 2014 operating results show the gold and copper head
The Mineral Reserve estimate for Cerro Corona is based on grades tracking marginally above the reported LoM reserve
a suitably detailed and engineered LoM plan. All design and grade. This is the result of the dynamic NSR cut-off grade
scheduling work is undertaken to an appropriate level of detail applied, prioritising better quality material through the
by experienced engineers using specialised mine planning plant, coupled with the revised pit sequencing during the last
software. The planning process incorporates relevant modifying year to manage the arsenic content to within final concentrate
factors and realistic production and processing rates supported threshold levels.
by an NSR cut-off and other techno-economic investigations,
The table in this section summarises the Cerro Corona
including optimised pit staging, geotechnical domain modelling
statement of Mineral Reserves. The terms and definitions are
and hydrogeological studies. Appropriate LoM sustaining capital
those given in the 2007 SAMREC Code.
is incorporated in the cash flow model to underpin the Mineral
Reserve. Low-grade stockpile material is scheduled for treatment
at the end of the LoM.

Gold Mineral Reserve classification


Tonnes (Mt) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                   

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit                  
Proved 46.8 55.3 77.4 0.95 0.97 0.89 1,426 1,722 2,212
Probable 9.9 8.0 26.3 0.72 0.78 0.67 230 200 563
Total open-pit 56.6 63.3 103.6 0.91 0.95 0.83 1,656 1,923 2,775
Surface stockpiles                  
Proved 3.8 3.9 – 0.82 0.83 – 101 102 –
Grand total 60.5 67.1 103.6 0.90 0.94 0.83 1,757 2,025 2,775

copper mineral resource classification

Tonnes (Mt) Grade (%) Copper (Mlb)


                   

Classification  Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit                  
Proved 46.8 55.3 77.4 0.48 0.49 0.47 499 603 798
Probable 9.9 8.0 26.3 0.44 0.46 0.42 96 80 240
Total open-pit 56.6 63.3 103.6 0.48 0.49 0.45 595 683 1,039
Surface stockpiles                  
Proved 3.8 3.9 – 0.33 0.33 – 28 28 –
Total surface
stockpiles 3.8 3.9 – 0.33 0.33 – 28 28 –
Grand total 60.5 67.1 103.6 0.47 0.48 0.45 623 712 1,039

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
28 Regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Factors that affected Mineral Factors that affected Mineral


Resource reconciliation year-on-year Reserve reconciliation YEAR-ON-YEAR 
• Decrease resulting from mining depletion  • Decrease resulting from mining depletion
• Geological and resource model updates • Updated pit staging and production scheduling
• NSR cut-off strategy • NSR cut-off strategy

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
3,500 3,318 2,500
7 3,015 2,025
3,000
(262) (50) (4) 2,000 49 7 1,757
2,500
(258) (1) (67)
2,000 1,500
1,500 1,000
1,000
500
500
0 0
Discovery

Inclusions/
Exclusions

Resource
modelling

Economic
factors

Discovery

Inclusions/
Exclusions

Resource
modelling

Economic
factors
Mined
depletion

Other

Mined
depletions

Other
Dec 2014

Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Dec 2013

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Copper − Mlb) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Copper − Mlb)
1,200 1,124 800 712
3 1,006 700 31 4
1,000 623
(97) (18) (6) 600 (4)
800 (96) (23)
500
600 400
400 300
200
200 100
0 0
Discovery

Inclusions/
Exclusions

Resource
modelling

Economic
factors

Discovery

Inclusions/
Exclusions

Resource
modelling

Economic
factors
Mined
depletions

Other

Mined
depletions

Other
Dec 2014

Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Dec 2013

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 29

Cerro Corona Mine (continued)

Reserve Sensitivity 
The Mineral Reserves are constrained by the tailing storage
COMPETENT PERSONS
facility and are therefore reasonably insensitive to changes in
Internal technical reviews have been conducted by
the metal price. Sensitivities are not based on detailed re-run
the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-time
depletion schedules and should be considered on a relative and employees of Gold Fields Limited.
indicative basis only.
Eddie Garcia: Mineral Resources Manager
Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold – Moz); (Copper – Blb) Mining Engineering
2.0 MBA, SAIMM (704963), SME (4028357), CIM (163652),
1.8
1.6 CIP (109603), Pontificia Universidad Católica del Perú. 
1.4
1.2
1.0
Eddie has 20 years’ experience in the mining industry
0.8 (seven years at Cerro Corona) and is responsible for
0.6
0.4 the overall accuracy, standard, and compliance of this
0.2 declaration.
0
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25%
Paul Gómez: Geology and Exploration Manager
Base gold price (US$1,300/oz); Copper (US$3.0/lb)
Geological Engineering
Universidad Nacional San Antonio Abad del Cusco
CIP (130253), Diplomate in Geometallurgy Pontificia
Universidad Católica del Perú.

Certified in applied geostatistics by the University


of Alberta, Paul has over 16 years’ experience in
consulting, exploration, mining and resource modelling
on world-class operations and is responsible for
the Geology Department and Exploration at Cerro
Corona Mine.

Hugo Solis: Chief Engineer


Mining Engineering
MBA, SME (4186259), CIP (77973), Universidad
Nacional Mayor de San Marcos.

Hugo has 19 years’ experience (nine years at


Cerro Corona) in surface and underground mining
operations. He is responsible for compliance of the
LoM planning, scheduling and reserve statement for
Cerro Corona.

Hugo Rios: Senior Resource Modeller


Geological Engineering
Universidad Nacional de Ingeniería, MBA, MAusIMM
(311727), CIP (92165), SEG (672559).

Certified in applied geostatistics by the University


of Alberta, Hugo has over 14 years’ experience in
exploration, mining and resource modelling. Currently,
he is responsible for the Resource Department at Cerro
Corona Mine. 

Angel Uzategui: Senior Mine Geologist


Geological Engineering
CIP (12337), Universidad Nacional San Agustín.

Angel has 21 years’ experience (nine years at Cerro


Corona) in surface and underground mining operations
and exploration. He is responsible for the Structural
and Geological interpretation at Cerro Corona Mine.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
30 Regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Salares Norte project – 100% attributable to GFI

Gold and Silver deposit in Chile


Mineral Resource of 3.1Moz gold and 33.6Moz silver
Location 

The Salares Norte Project is located in the Atacama region of Northern Chile. The nearest town is Diego de Almagro, about
190 kilometres by road to the west of the project. The target is centred on latitude of 26°0'42"S and longitude of 68°53'35"W,
with elevations between 4,200 and 4,900 metres AMSL.

Project history and ownership complex along the contact of two volcanic domes of andesitic
and dacitic composition. Most of the mineralisation known to
Gold Fields discovered the mineralisation at Salares Norte
date is oxidised. The sulphide mineralisation contains mainly
in March 2011 with reverse circulation drilling. To date a total
pyrite. Preliminary metallurgical test results indicate extraction
of 43,346 metres has been drilled in 134 holes on the project
in the order of 90% using a conventional Carbon in Leach (CIL)
(27 reverse circulation holes and 107 diamond drill holes).
process on samples of oxidised material.
The Salares Norte Project is owned by Minera Gold Fields
Level of study, processing methodology,
Salares Norte Ltda (MGFSNL), which holds 900ha of exploitation
sustainability and permits
concessions (mining rights), with definitive title granted.
Gold Fields also has option to purchase agreements for two An Interim Scoping Study was completed in 2014 and an
blocks of exploitation concessions attached to the project, environmental impact declaration (DIA) was approved by the
totalling 2,100ha. Gold Fields Limited holds a 100% interest in authorities in January 2014 for the next phase of exploration.
MGFSNL. Negotiations for the right of way have been initiated Exploration work during 2014 (8,223 metres at US$8.205 million)
with the government. has warranted additional drilling and the approved exploration
budget for 2015 is US$23.5 million, to drill approximately
Geology and Mineralisation 40,000m.
The Salares Norte Project is located in the northern part of the
The 2015 exploration budget is funding an aggressive drilling
Maricunga Belt, an area with a predominance of Cenozoic
programme focussed on infill-drilling on the high-grade portion
volcanic rocks, comprised of eroded strato-volcanos, volcanic
of the main ore body and resource delineation drilling at Agua
domes and pyroclastic rocks.
Amarga, a contiguous area to the main mineralised zone. Results
Mineralisation at Salares Norte is contained in a high- of this programme will inform a decision in Q3 2015 on the future
sulphidation epithermal system, hosted mainly by a breccia strategy for this promising project.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 31

Salares Norte classified Mineral Resource 


           

Tonnage Gold grade Silver grade Gold metal Silver metal


 (Mt) (g/t) (g/t)  (Moz)  (Moz)
           

           

Inferred 23.3 4.15 44.8 3.1 33.6


1. Mineral Resources are reported in accordance with the SAMREC Code.
2. Confidence classification assumes annual production-scale, bulk open-pit mining scenario evaluation.
3. Figures are rounded to reflect confidence and Mineral Resources are reported without dilution and ore loss.
4. Mineral Resources are constrained within an optimised open-pit shell and the commodity prices used are as per the December 2013 reporting period at US$1,500/oz gold and
US$28.20/oz silver.
5. These Mineral Resources are classified as Inferred, but future infill-drilling may materially change the Mineral Resource.

A comprehensive quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) protocol is in place at all the Gold Fields operations and projects,
using leading industry practice in data acquisition, reputable certified laboratories and analytical controls

Competent Persons 
Nate Brewer
(AIPG CPG 7042) is the lead Competent Person for this project and is responsible for overall compliance. The Mineral
Resource declaration was prepared under his supervision.

Alex Trueman
BSc (Hons) Geology; PGeo, APEGBC 149753;MAusIMM CP (Geo) 110730; Chief Resource Geologist and is responsible for
Mineral Resource estimation and reporting.

Susan Poos
P.E. 30975, SME Registered Member 2571200, prepared the mining constraints associated with the Resource declaration.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
32 regions, operations and projects

2.1 Americas region (continued)

Woodjam project – 51% attributable to GFI 

Copper and Gold Deposit in Canada


Mineral Resource of 0.6Moz gold and 1,705Mlb copper
Location 

The Woodjam project is approximately 370km northeast of Vancouver B.C. The project is centred over latitude 54°14’54”N, longitude
121°21’26”W and is about 1,000m above sea level. Well established roads and supporting infrastructure exists in the area allowing for
year round work. Active Cu-Au mines in the area include Mount Polley and Gibraltar.

All project interests and rights are held by Gold Fields Horsefly Exploration Corp., a subsidiary of Gold Fields. The project has been
inactive during 2014 as efforts to divest this non-core project are being made. No exploration occurred on the project in 2014 and
none is planned for 2015. Consequently, the 2013 resource estimate has not been updated. 

A comprehensive quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) protocol is in place at all the Gold Fields operations and projects,
using leading industry practice in data acquisition, reputable certified laboratories and analytical controls 

Subproject Area Ownership Comments

Woodjam North 43,898ha 51% GF, 49% WCC GF has rights to earn up to a 70% interest
Woodjam South 14,258ha 51% GF, 49% WCC GF has rights to earn up to a 70% interest
Rand 1,500ha 51% GF, 49% TLR GF has rights to earn up to a 80% interest
Magalloy 650ha 0% WJP, 100% PV WJP has rights to acquire 100% interest, included
in Woodjam North agreement
Megaton 651ha 0% WJP, 100% PV WJP has rights to acquire 100% interest, included
in Woodjam South agreement
GF, Gold Fields.
WCC, Consolidated Woodjam Copper Corp., a public company.
TLR, Teslin River Resources Corp., a public company. 
WJP, Woodjam Partners, collectively Gold Fields and Consolidated Woodjam Copper Corp.
PV, Private vendors, namely Herb Wahl, Jack Brown John and Jim Brown John.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 33

Geology and mineralisation


The Woodjam project is located in the Quesnel Trough, a large depositional basin, which includes dominantly alkali and sub-alkali
volcanic and sedimentary rocks and hosts many of the copper and gold porphyry deposits in British Columbia.

The project is underlain by a succession of Triassic to Jurassic Nicola volcanic and volcano-sedimentary rocks that are intruded
by several early Jurassic small volume monzonite intrusions and the large Takomkane batholith. Quaternary basaltic volcanic and
volcaniclastic rocks overlap these older units.

Porphyry deposits across the property are dominantly copper with lesser gold and molybedenite mineralisation. At the Southeast zone,
the largest deposit, mineralisation is hosted entirely within lithologies of the Takomkane batholith. This is in contrast to mineralisation
associated with the small volume monzonite intrusions (Megabuck, Deerhorn, Takom and Three Firs deposits), which are located within
the intrusions and also developed in the surrounding volcanic and sedimentary host rocks.

Mineral Resource
Details of the project, including the most recent resource reports were filed in July 2013 by our partner, Consolidated Woodjam
Copper Corp., and are available for download from SEDAR http://sedar.com/.

Woodjam: Inferred Mineral Resources


  December 2014 Dec 2013
Mineral Resource Tonnes Grade Metal Metal
Gold and Copper (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz)
Inferred – Gold 41.1 0.44 0.584 0.584
  Cu Cu Cu
  (%) (Mlb) (Mlb)
Inferred – Copper 262.8 0.29 1,705 1,705
Woodjam resource table notes:
1. These Mineral Resources are reported in accordance with the South African Code for the Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources, and Mineral Reserves, 2007
Edition (SAMREC Code). Confidence classification assumes annual production-scale, bulk open-pit mining scenario evaluation.
2. The Mineral Resources have not been updated as no new exploration has been completed and the project is in the process of being divested. 
3. These Mineral Resources are not Mineral Reserves and are reported without dilution and ore loss.
4. All tonnes (t) relate to metric units. Rounding-off of figures may result in minor computational discrepancies, where this happens it is not deemed significant. The last Mineral
Resources were determined using a gold price of US$1,650/oz and a copper price of US$3.9/lb. However, the 2011 maiden resource for the Southeast Zone used metal prices
of US$1,450/oz gold and US$3.90/lb copper.
5. The Mineral Resources are constrained within an optimised pit shell using scoping study level assumptions for mining, processing, and administration cost estimates; mining
parameters; and process recoveries for copper and gold.
6. Attributable metal to Gold Fields is 51%.
7. Depending on the date of estimation the resource cut-off grades were US$7.50 to US$8.60/tonne based on NSR calculations. The NSR is calculated using scoping level
recoveries, transport costs and smelter terms and the cut-off cost is the breakeven mining cost based on scoping level opex and sustaining capital estimates.

Competent Persons 
Dr Ross Sherlock
(PGeo; APEGBC 23778) of Gold Fields Canada Exploration BV, who holds the position of Exploration Manager for North
America is the principal Competent Person (CP) for this disclosure and this Report was completed under his supervision.
Ross was onsite in a supervisory role, and was actively involved in the 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 and 2013 exploration
programme

Alex Trueman
BSc (Hons) Geology; PGeo, APEGBC 149753;MAusIMM CP (Geo) 110730; Chief Resource Geologist and is responsible for
Mineral Resource estimation and reporting.

Susan Poos
P.E. 30975, SME Registered Member 2571200, prepared the mining constraints associated with the Resource declaration.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
2.2 Australia region

Consolidated portfolio of highly


prospective, orogenic greenstone
hosted ore bodies. Combined with
the demonstrated management
capability in Western Australia,
the region is ideally positioned to Western Australia
support the Gold Fields vision

The Australia region currently Mineral Resources

accounts for 10% of the gold (excluding Growth Projects)

Mineral Resource and 7%


of the gold Mineral Reserve
10.0 million ounces
base, excluding growth Mineral Reserves

projects.
3.6 million ounces 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 35

• Brownfield exploration momentum has been increased to realise


the discovery potential inherent across the region 
• Successful and rapid integration of the new Yilgarn South Assets
during 2014
• The current Life-of-Mine’s (LoM’s) are based on the Proved and
Probable Mineral Reserves as at 31 December 2014. Historical
trends for these orogenic deposits show that with appropriate
investment for ongoing exploration, both new discovery and
resource extensions typically support a sustainable Mineral
Reserve and prolonged LoM.

Operations
Agnew Gold Mine WESTERN
Mineral Resources 
AUSTRALIA
2.6 million ounces
Mineral Reserves

0.9 million ounces
• FBH represents the primary take-over mining front at Waroonga,
as the Kim lode advances to maturity 
• Increased Mineral Reserve ounces at FBH and proven high-grade
‘link’ between the Kim and FBH mineralised lodes Perth
• Continued positive exploration results at Waroonga North and the
Kath Projects
• Positive results at Cinderella – situated approximately 300m from
New Holland development
• Highly prospective areas targeted for resource growth contiguous
to the present mining at Waroonga and New Holland
• LoM, based on current Mineral Reserves extends to 2019
(five years).

Darlot Gold Mine


Mineral Resources

0.3 million ounces


Mineral Reserves

0.1 million ounces


• Imperative is to discover new Mineral Resources and convert to
Mineral Reserves to sustain mine production levels 
• Darlot continues to offer upside potential from the newly discovered
Centenary Depth Analogue (CDA) area
• A reduction in bulk mining practice is delivering improvements in
ore recovery and dilution with improved head grade
• Extensive portfolio of  exploration targets to be tested
• LoM based on current mineral reserves extend to mid-2016
(18 months)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
36 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Granny Smith Gold Mine


Mineral Resources

3.7 million ounces


Mineral Reserves

0.9 million ounces


• 1.4 million ounce increase in Wallaby Underground Mineral Resource
• Quality ore body with high grades and good continuity
• Exploration drilling on Zones 130 – 150 has returned significant
intercepts that retain a very positive outlook for the Wallaby deposit
at depth
WESTERN
• LoM based on current Mineral Reserves extend to 2019 (five years) AUSTRALIA
St Ives Gold Mine
Mineral Resources

3.5 million ounces


Mineral Reserves

1.8 million ounces


Perth
• Investing in the next generation of mines with exploration focussed
at Invincible underground, Invincible trend and the recently acquired
Kambalda West tenements
• Open-pit capital development has commenced on the newly
discovered high-grade Invincible deposit, with first production
planned during H1 2015. Invincible underground exploration
continues with maiden underground Mineral Reserve reported
• Neptune open-pit stage 1 completed and evaluation of future stages
underway. Ongoing evaluation targeting the extensive palaeochannel
network with shallow high-grade positions and optionality for
bulk mining to be assessed
• LoM based on current Mineral Reserves extend to 2020 (six years)

Far Southeast (FSE) Project


Mineral Resources 

Au 19.8 million ounces PHILIPPINES


Cu 9,921 million pounds
• Large copper-gold porphyry deposit in the Philippines 
• Various mining concept studies completed regarding mining
method, higher-grade extraction options and production rates Manila
• 40% attributable to Gold Fields

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 37

  Operational profiles
 

  St Ives Agnew Darlot Granny Smith

Open-pit, long-hole sub- Waroonga: Long-hole Combination of retreat Combination of inclined


level stoping and others sub-level stoping and long-hole open stoping, room and pillar,
Mining method others minor room and pillar transverse long-hole
open stope and bulk
long-hole open stoping
   New Holland: Retreat up-      
  
hole long-hole stoping

Three open pits, four Two underground One active underground One active underground
underground mines and complexes and one mine. A processing mine. A processing
one gold processing active processing plant with a capacity of plant with a capacity
plant with a capacity of plant, with a capacity of 0.8Mtpa consisting of of 3.5Mtpa consisting
4.7Mtpa consisting of a 1.3Mtpa consisting of a three-stage crushing of two crushing circuits,
SAG mill, gravity circuit a three-stage crushing circuit, two-stage milling SAG and ball mills,
Infrastructure and
and a five-stage Carbon circuit, two-stage milling circuit, gravity circuit and leach and Carbon in
Mineral Processing
in Pulp (CIP) circuit. Gold circuit, gravity circuit Carbon in Leach (CIL) Pulp (CIP) circuits and
is recovered by electro and Carbon in Pulp (CIP) gold plant  a tailings re-treatment
winning circuit circuit. However, it is mine
constrained and currently
operates at 1.5Mtpa on a
campaign milling basis

Tailings are alternately TSF is projected to last Tailings capacity exists to The TSF is projected to
deposited on two until 2018 and options beyond the current mine last beyond the current
paddock-type TSFs, to build a new TSF or life within the existing TSF Life-of-Mine
Tailings storage
which with ongoing raise the current facility 2 and 3 facilities
facility (TSF)
lifts meet current LoM are being assessed to
requirements provide capacity beyond
2018

Mineralisation style Orogenic Greenstone hosted (Hydrothermal-style)


Mineralisation typically structurally controlled and hosted by shear and fault zones and confined to
well-defined prospective structural belts
Mineralisation Mineralisation zones discontinuous with short-range Mineralisation zones with moderate to long range
characteristics predictability geological continuity and short-range grade continuity
Exploration programmes required to drive discovery, define the mineralisation controls, establish continuity
and convert Mineral Resources to Mineral Reserves

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
38 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Post the Regional overview with finely disseminated gold associated with
zones of strong hydrothermal alteration. Alteration
Yilgarn Gold Fields’ mining assets in the Australia region
include a 100% interest in the St Ives, Agnew,
comprises silica or albite-rich zones, associated
with ankerite, sericite, biotite or amphibole,
South Darlot and Granny Smith mines in Western
together with pyrite, pyrrhotite or arsenopyrite as
Australia.
acquisition, sulphide bearing phases.
Regional Geology
the All four operations fall within the geological
Exploration drilling and expenditure

Australia region known as the Archaean Norseman-Wiluna


Exploration activities in the region over the period
were dominated by resource conversion projects
region now Greenstone Belt. This is part of the Yilgarn Craton
a 2.6Ga granite-greenstone terrain, which is well
through infill-drilling and extensions to existing
resources or upgrading known targets. Extensional
contributes endowed in gold and nickel mineralisation.
exploration activities are to be continued in 2015,

45% Much of the Yilgarn Craton is deeply weathered with several high-quality targets to be drill tested.
and partially covered by Tertiary and Quaternary
of Gold regolith. Pre-Tertiary lateritic horizons are variably
On-lease exploration metres drilled and
expenditure for the 12-month periods ending
Fields’ total exposed, stripped or buried by later deposits
31 December 2013 and 2014 are summarised
that have in turn been lateritised. The depth of
produced weathering is strongly controlled by original rock
below. The region reflects a significant year-
on-year ramp up in exploration drilling to drive
ounces types, with mafic rocks generally being more
susceptible to weathering than felsic rocks.
discovery and build a solid project pipeline.

In accordance with the SAMREC 2007 Code,


Deposits are hosted within a diverse range
the region maintains rigorous QA/QC protocols
of rocks, including basalts and dolerites, fine
on all its exploration programmes. It draws on
to coarse-grained sedimentary rocks, and
industry leading practice for data acquisition and
felsic to intermediate intrusions. Host rocks are
utilises accredited laboratories which are regularly
commonly metamorphosed to greenschist or lower
reviewed both internally and externally. Analytical
amphibolite facies. Gold mineralisation is typically
QA/QC is maintained and monitored through the
structurally controlled, occurring within a network
submission of blanks, certified reference material
of shear zones proximal to major regional faults.
and duplicates plus umpire laboratory checks.
The most important gold mineralisation styles are
shear hosted quartz-carbonate bearing breccia
lodes and associated quartz vein arrays, together

   December 2014 December 2013


                   

   Metres A$ US$ Metres A$ US$


Exploration drilling drilled  (millions)  (millions) drilled  (millions)  (millions)

Operations                 
Agnew 56,137 15.11 13.60 20,212 4.40 4.23
Darlot 50,154 7.50 6.75 9,178 1.23 1.18
Granny Smith 77,433 13.04 11.74 20,455 2.59 2.49
St Ives 133,765 24.84 22.36 170,126 21.90 21.06
Total GFA 317,489 60.50 54.45 219,971 30.11 28.95
Average 2014 exchange rate: US$=A$1.1
December 2013 includes average quarterly cost for the Yilgarn South Assets in Q4
Exclusive of grade control drilling
Drilling unit costs are affected by the length, type (DD, RC, air core or sonic), ground conditions, rig and site availability, as well as whether drilling is from surface or underground.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 39

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves • Open-pit Mineral Resources comprise the material above
the nominated cut-off within a diluted optimised pit shell and
Mineral Resources
constrained to an optimised minimum mining width shape 
The Mineral Resources declared within the Australia region are • Underground Mineral Resources comprise the material above
classified as Measured, Indicated or Inferred, as described the nominated cut-off and constrained to a practical mining
in the SAMREC Code. Mineral Resource categories are shape and a minimum mining width. 
assigned with consideration given to geological complexity,
grade variance, drill hole intersection spacing, and mining Mineral Reserves
development. The following factors apply to the Mineral The Mineral Reserve estimates are based on appropriately
Resources reported: detailed and engineered LoM plans. All design and scheduling
work is undertaken to an appropriate level of detail by
• All Mineral Resources are declared using a cut-off grade
experienced engineers using appropriate mine planning
calculated for the individual deposit
software. The planning process incorporates appropriate
• Mineral Resources are further tested through the application
modifying factors and the use of cut-off grades and other
of realistic modifying factors to ensure that there is a
techno-economic investigations. 
reasonable prospect of eventual economic extraction
• Mineral Resources are quoted at an appropriate in situ
economic cut-off grade with tonnages and grades based
on the relevant resource block models. They also include
estimates of any material below the cut-off grade required
to be mined to extract the complete pay portion of the
Mineral Resource

Australia Region: Summary Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Statement for Operational Mines1
  Mineral Resources (100%) Mineral Reserves (100%)
     

  31 Dec 2014 Dec 13 31 Dec 2014 Dec 13

  Tonnes Grade Gold Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Gold


Measured, Indicated (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz) Proved (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz)
and Inferred and Probable 

Australia operations Australia operations


Agnew 13.8 5.79 2.57 3.66 Agnew 3.6 7.44 0.87 0.95
Darlot 1.1 7.18 0.26 0.27 Darlot 0.4 7.36 0.09 0.15
Granny Smith 17.4 6.61 3.70 3.25 Granny Smith 4.5 6.02 0.87 0.84
St Ives 30.1 3.63 3.51 4.34 St Ives 17.8 3.14 1.80 2.02
Total Australia 62.4 5.00 10.04 11.52 Total Australia 26.3 4.28 3.63 3.97
region region
Managed, unless otherwise stated. 
1

Mineral Resources are inclusive of Mineral Reserves.


All tonnes (t) relate to metric units and rounding-off of figures may result in minor computational discrepancies, where this happens, it is not deemed significant. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
40 regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Social licence to operate energy efficiency was conducted in 2014 geared towards
seeking further opportunities for improvement and to include
All operations in Gold Fields Australia have suitably resourced
the newly acquired Yilgarn assets into the energy management
departments responsible for Health, Safety, Environment, Risk,
plan. Energy and carbon reduction targets were updated during
Emergency and Security Management. The region subscribes
2014 in the case of St Ives, due to changes in the mine plan.
to a range of internationally recognised standards including
Agnew’s targets were also updated since its consolidation with
ISO 14001 for Environmental Management and OHSAS 18001 for
Lawlers and targets have been set for the Granny Smith and
Health and Safety.
Darlot Mines. All targets have been set till 2016. 
The Gold Fields Australia operations comply with the
Gold Fields has a well-established Enterprise-wide Risk
requirements of the International Cyanide Management Code.
Management (ERM) system in place. This system requires
In 2014, Granny Smith achieved Cyanide Code re-certification,
the formulation of risk registers for each operation, detailing
ISO 14001 Certification and OHSAS 18001 Certification. During
the most material business risks and the management actions
2014 the Lawlers operations were amalgamated under the
to mitigate these. During 2014, the requirements of the ERM
Agnew certification through an expansion of the audit scope
were implemented at the acquired Yilgarn assets through
by the certifying body. Darlot has achieved certification to the
the development of full risk registers for each site. These risk
OHSAS 18001 standard and re-certification for ISO 14001.
registers have been integrated into CURA, the centralised Gold
In terms of energy management, Gold Fields Australia had Fields web-based risk management system. The risk registers
undertaken a baseline review of the St Ives and Agnew assets for all assets in Gold Fields Australia are reviewed quarterly. 
during 2012. Numerous action items were identified to improve
the energy efficiency of the operations. Ongoing review of

           

      Total        
   Fatal Recordable    CO2   
   Injury Injury Energy emissions Water
   Frequency Frequency consumption (000 tonnes) withdrawal
Sustainability factors Rate Rate (TJ) (scope 1 and 2) (million litres)
                    

                    

C2014 – 18.13 655 75.5 1,572


Agnew
C2013 – 21.881 426 49.9 803
C2014 – 13.17 262 33.0 542
Darlot
C2013 – na na na na
C2014 – 9.30 630 86.3 7,843
Granny Smith
C2013 – na na na na
C2014 – 22.39 1,738 186.5 9,571
St Ives
C2013 – 24.02 1,630 175.2 14,182
1 Excludes Lawlers data for Q4 2013.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 41

Agnew Gold Mine 


www.goldfields.com

Agnew has an intensified focus on defining new ore sources at New Holland and Waroonga in conjunction with targeted exploration
programmes testing an expanded area beyond current mining fronts, such as Waroonga North and the under-explored Cinderella
trend. The objective is to increase the Resource and Reserve base to sustain a robust five-year plan with an improved understanding
of the broader regional targets to discover the next generation mines. Development of the FBH area at Waroonga continues on plan to
compensate for Kim post-2016.

General location

Agnew is situated at latitude 27° 55’ S and longitude 120° 42’ E in the Norseman-Wiluna Greenstone Belt. It is located 23km west of
the town of Leinster in Western Australia, which is 375km north of Kalgoorlie and approximately 1,000km north-east of Perth. Well-
established power, access roads and supporting infrastructure are in place.

Asset fundamentals
The Agnew Gold Mining Company Proprietary Limited (AGMC), ACN 098-385-883, was incorporated
in Australia in 2001 as the legal entity holding and conducting mining activity on the Agnew
LICENCE STATUS AND mineral leases. The Gold Fields Limited Group holds 100% of the issued shares of AGMC through its
HOLDINGS 100% holding in the issued shares of Orogen Holding (BVI) Limited. Agnew controls exploration and
mineral rights over a total area of 69,269 hectares (total of granted tenements) and has security of
tenure for all current exploration and mining leases that contribute to future Mineral Reserves

Agnew currently operates two underground mines, Waroonga and New Holland. At Waroonga, ore
is sourced from the Kim and Main North lodes that are accessed via declines. New Holland mining
OPERATIONAL
occurs in two primary areas – Genesis 500 and Sheba – that are accessed via declines. There are
INFRASTRUCTURE
also centralised administrative offices, engineering workshops at both Waroonga and New Holland
and one active CIP processing plant (1.3Mtpa capacity)

CLIMATE No extreme climate conditions are experienced that may affect mining operations

Orogenic greenstone gold deposits hosted in a number of different styles of lodes. Although all of
the Agnew deposits broadly occur at the intersections between structures and stratigraphy, there are
DEPOSIT TYPE
subtle differences in alteration and mineralisation, that are controlled in part by the local host rock
chemistry

Ongoing extensional and brownfields exploration continues, which could increase the LoM. It is
LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM)
estimated that the current Mineral Reserves will be depleted in 2019 (five years)

Agnew continues to be certified to OHSAS 18001:2007 and ISO 14001:2004 Environmental


Management System. During 2014 the New Holland operations were amalgamated under these
ENVIRONMENTAL/
certifications
HEALTH AND SAFETY
Agnew was certified as compliant with the International Cyanide Management Code (ICMC) on
3 June 2009 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
42 regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Brief history of Agnew Key developments


Paddy Lawlers’ prospecting party discovered gold at Lamehorse • Continued delineation of the high-grade ore shoots beneath
Soak in 1894, approximately 10km south of Agnew. The Great Main North – FBH reflects an improved Mineral Reserve of
Eastern and Donegal leases were pegged in the same year and 348koz and Mineral Resource of 585koz in 2014. 
mining commenced. The discovery and subsequent mining of • Exploration drilling to the north of Kim lode has continued
the Waroonga, Glasgow Lass, New Holland and Cinderella areas to return positive results from the Kath and Waroonga North
all commenced before 1899. East Murchison United commenced projects, with initial resource models expected in 2015.
the mining of nine underground levels at Main Lode in 1935 and • Drilling at Cinderella has confirmed the interpretation
the mine was operational until 1948. and increased the size of two targeted lodes at depths of
approximately 80m and 140m.
In 1976 Western Mining Corporation (WMC) purchased the • Higher-grade shoots have been interpreted within the Main
Waroonga leases and in 1984 Forsayth NL purchased the Great North and Main South lodes during 2014. 
Eastern leases and modern open-pit mining commenced at • Capital development to mine FBH commenced in late 2014
both Waroonga (450 South) and Lawlers in the mid 1980s. and is progressing on plan.
Additional discoveries at Redeemer (1985) Cox-Crusader (1987)
and Genesis (1990) ensured that both the Emu and Lawlers
mills operated at capacity while additional open-pit discoveries
at New Holland (1991) and Fairyland (1997) were made before
underground mining commenced at New Holland in 1998.

The Lawlers operation was purchased by Plutonic Resources


from Forsayth in 1992 and was subsequently acquired
by Homestake in 1998. During 2001, Barrick merged with
Homestake and Gold Fields acquired Agnew from WMC. The
Kim South lode at Waroonga was discovered in 2002, as was
Songvang OP, with production commencing in 2002 and 2004
respectively. Further discoveries were made at Fairyland UG
(2009) and Fitzroy, Bengal and Hastings (FBH) in 2012. Gold
Fields concluded the acquisition of the neighbouring Lawlers
Mine from Barrick in October 2013.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 43

270000E
255000E
N

Cams
PLAN SHOWING AGNEW MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT DECEMBER 2014

0 1 3 5

Kilometres

Map Grid of Australia Co-ordinate System

Maria North Pit

Maria South Pit


Leinster Downs Station
Leinster Airport

6915000N 6915000N

Leinster Townsite

Genesis Pit
New Holland Pit
Agnew Sandstone Road
Go
Vivien Pit ld
Hig field
Waroonga Office hw s
Emu Office ay
6900000N
Waroonga Pit 6900000N

Emu Tailings Storage Emu Agnew Turet Pit


Mill Townsite

North Pit McCaffery


Redeemer Office
Redeemer Pit

Lawlers Fairyland

Crusader Pit

6885000N 6885000N

Songvang Pit

Road
Pinnacles

Ol
dA
gn
ew
Ro
ad
d
oa
R
a
ar
ild
W
bo
Wee
270000E

Reference
Roads Open-pit
Agnew mining Lease Waste Dump
Agnew Prospecting Licence
Agnew Exploration Licence

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
44 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

OPERATING STATISTICS
Historic performance Agnew
           

  Units C2014 C2013 1


C2012 C2011

Open-pit mining          
Total mined kt – – 262 1,612
– Waste mined kt – – 83 1,024
– Ore mined kt – – 179 588
Mined grade g/t – – 1.4 1.6
Strip ratio (tonnes) waste:ore – – 0.5 2.1
Underground mining          
Total mined kt 1,767 1,236 845 1,283
– Waste mined kt 573 506 222 662
– Ore mined kt 1,194 730 623 621
Mined grade g/t 7.2 9.1 8.5 9.7
Processing          
Tonnes treated kt 1,246 974 943 935
Head grade g/t 7.1 7.5 6.1 7.0
Yield g/t 6.8 6.9 5.8 6.5
Plant recovery factor % 94.4 92.9 93.2 94.0
Total gold production koz 271 216 177 194
Financials          
Exchange rate (annual average) USD: A$ 0.90 1.04      
Operating cost A$/oz 708 647 808 691
Capital expenditure A$/oz 341 250 342 371
A$/oz 1,097 949 1,253 1,108
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC)
US$/oz 990 919 – –
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 3.6 4.2 6.0 7.1
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 7.44 7.05 5.96 5.70
Mineral Reserves Moz 0.87 0.95 1.15 1.30
1
 Dec 2013 is inclusive of the New Holland Operation Q4 results only, Dec 2013 Mineral Reserves also inclusive of Lawlers
Rounding off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 45

Agnew Gold Mine (continued)

Local geology  higher grade trends in the 200 Series is being modelled but the
potential for a significant new mining front appears limited.
Agnew Gold Mine is situated in the northern portion of the
Norseman-Wiluna Greenstone Belt of the Yilgarn Craton, Initial drilling of the Himitsu and extensional drilling of the
Western Australia. Locally the Belt comprises a sequence Cinderella targets was undertaken during late 2014. Himitsu is
of mafic to ultramafic volcanics and associated interflow located south of the New Holland mine and extends to Hidden
sediments, which have been folded to form the Lawlers Secret. Drilling is targeting high-grade, flat westerly lodes similar
Anticline. The Lawlers Anticline plunges in a northerly direction to the 500 Series, but at initial depths of approximately 200m
at approximately 30°. The core of the anticline has been intruded below surface. A number of mineralised intervals were observed
by granodiorite, which in turn has been intruded by late stage in some holes, with sulphide mineralisation and visible gold
leucogranite. also recorded. At Cinderella, a programme of RC drilling was
completed targeting extensions of the known lodes to the west
The mafic and ultramafic volcanics of the Lawlers Anticline are
and south. Several high-grade intervals were returned and follow
unconformably overlain by a sequence of clastic sediments
up diamond core drilling has confirmed further extensions to two
comprising the Scotty Creek Formation. The sedimentary rocks
lodes approximately 85m and 145m below surface and located
have been metamorphosed to lower greenschist facies and
approximately 250m east of existing New Holland development.
comprise conglomerates and very fine- to very coarse-grained
pebbly sandstones and siltstones. The rocks within the AGMC No exploration was conducted in the extended regional areas at
mining leases are dominantly covered by transported alluvium, Agnew in 2014.
and minor residual soils, or by localised thick accumulations of
Permian sedimentary rocks blanketed by more recent clay and Agnew maintains rigorous QA/QC protocols on all of its
sediments. exploration programmes. It draws on industry leading practice
for data acquisition and utilises accredited laboratories, which
The Agnew deposits are broadly hosted by the intersections are regularly reviewed, both internally and externally. Analytical
between various structures and the relative stratigraphy. Gold QA/QC is maintained and monitored through the submission of
mineralisation largely occurs in quartz veins within the sample blanks, certified reference material and duplicates, plus
sedimentary units of the Scotty Creek Formation. umpire laboratory checks.

Exploration and resource definition drilling Mining


There is considerable endowment potential within the Agnew
Current mining consists of the Waroonga and New Holland
tenement holdings and the greater land package cannot yet be
underground complexes’, with the bulk of production presently
considered advanced in exploration terms.
sourced from the high-grade Kim South lode and the high-grade
500 Series lode respectively. The Main North and Sheba lodes
Exploration in 2014 focussed on extensions to both the
provide valuable additional mining fronts; and combined, all four
Waroonga and New Holland mineralised systems and at
areas form the basis of the 2015 Operational Plan.
Cinderella, which is centrally located between the two mines.
At Waroonga, drilling delineated the ‘Link’ which comprises high-
Mining methods
grade mineralisation importantly bridging the Kim/Edmunds and
Access to the Waroonga underground mine is via a decline with
FBH lodes. Further drill testing north of Waroonga has continued
the portal located in the previously mined Waroonga open-
to return significant gold intersections with frequent visible gold
pit. In 2014 the Waroonga mine produced from the Kim, Main
shows from both the Kath and Waroonga North projects. Early
North and Rajah lodes. All primary infrastructures, including
stage resource models for both of these areas are expected
escape ways and ventilation shafts, are located in the competent
in early 2015, while mineralisation remains open at depth and
sandstone of  the hanging wall. The primary mining method at
along strike.
Waroonga is long-hole sub-level stoping with paste fill. 
At New Holland drilling focussed on extending the 500 Series
Access to the New Holland underground mine is via declines
lode and also targeted the 600/700 Series, which is located
with portals located in the Genesis and New Holland open
beneath the current mine development. Interpretation and
pits. In 2014, the New Holland underground mine produced
modelling of the results is continuing, but drilling has confirmed
from the Sheba, and 500 Series areas. The selection of the
the continuation of the 500 Series structure to the north, while
stoping method is dependent upon the geometry of the ore
to the south several high-grade intervals have been returned
structure. The primary mining method employed at New Holland
east of the 500 Series highlighting likely extensions east of the
is retreat up-hole long-hole mining. 
current mine plan. New information provided by drill testing the

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
46 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Mine planning and scheduling approximately 490m in length. This project has reduced mine
The current mining areas situated at Waroonga include high- temperatures and greatly improved ventilation, thereby allowing
grade ore from Kim South, supplemented with medium-grade mining to occur in a greater number of areas and improved
ore from Main North forming the basis for the 2015 Operational re‑entry times after blasting.
Plan. At New Holland mining is planned to continue in the
Improvements to the current paste-fill backbone infrastructure at
500 Series and Sheba areas. The stope design takes practical
Waroonga continue to be implemented with new holes designed
stope layouts and geometry into consideration, as well as
to bypass a large proportion of the old pipe infrastructure and
planning for mining losses in pillars or other parts of the
improve paste delivery at the bottom of the mine.
resource excluded for technical reasons. Dilution material
is included in the stope design. Ore losses can occur when The operation continues to examine and review the possibility
material cannot be practically extracted from the stopes. of opportunistically exploiting small-scale open pitable deposits
for supplementary mill feed. Surface opportunities at Hidden
LoM plans have been generated for these areas with the
Secret, Cinderella, Zone 2, Claudius and Songvang continue to
necessary development, advance rates and sustaining capital to
be assessed.
maintain the planned production schedules and profiled grade
and tonnage. Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves
Projects Geological and evaluation models have been updated as
at December 2014 to reflect the latest available data sets.
In late 2014 capital development to access the FBH ore body
An integrated mine design and schedule, based on current
commenced. The capital programme to access FBH involves
performance levels, takes cognisance of the inherent risks
access declines from the existing Kim infrastructure and
associated with mining operations at Agnew.
additional ventilation rises to provide ventilation to the FBH
mining areas. Mineral Resources

A number of operational improvement projects were completed The Mineral Resources are classified as Measured, Indicated
at Agnew during 2014 and a dominant theme at both mines or Inferred, as described in the SAMREC Code 2007. Mineral
was air quality and ventilation. At Waroonga, refrigerated air Resource categories are assigned with consideration given to
was successfully incorporated into the ventilation system and geological complexity, grade variance, drill hole intersection
resulted in a significant drop in temperatures throughout the spacing, and mining development. The impacts of year-on-year
mine. At New Holland, a new 4.5m diameter vent rise was changes are covered in the reconciliation section.
completed that extended from the 22 level to the surface,

Mineral Resource classification


Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                   

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit and underground                  


Measured 2,246 3,193 3,863 4.17 4.57 4.71 302 469 585
Indicated 8,655 11,059 11,983 6.43 6.02 4.86 1,789 2,139 1,873
Inferred 2,841 4,881 7,084 5.20 6.66 4.53 475 1,045 1,031
Total open-pit and underground 13,742 19,133 22,930 5.81 5.94 4.73 2,565 3,653 3,489
Surface                  
Measured stockpiles 56 62 223 2.62 1.81 1.55 5 4 11
Total surface 56 62 223 2.62 1.81 1.55 5 4 11
Grand total 13,798 19,196 23,153 5.79 5.92 4.70 2,570 3,657 3,501

Mineral Resources for 2012 – represent Agnew only as this was prior to the acquisition of Lawlers

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 47

Agnew Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resource classification per source area 

  Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource


                          

  Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Area (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz)

Open-pit                        
Miranda – Cams Pit – – – 262 4.50 38 – – – 262 4.50 38
Miranda – Maria Pit – – – 68 4.70 10 11 1.89 1 79 4.32 11
Waroonga – 450
South Pit 20 2.11 1 41 6.79 9 5 3.69 1 66 5.11 11
Waroonga – New
Woman Pit – – – 11 4.04 1 3 5.32 0.5 13 4.28 2
Waroonga –
Cinderella Pit – – – 228 3.34 25 12 2.13 1 240 3.29 25
Redeemer – North
Zone 2 Pit 74 3.50 8 60 3.33 6  –  –  – 134 3.41 15
Redeemer – South
Zone 2 Pit 28 2.27 2 93 3.40 10 51 3.45 6 172 3.23 18
Crusader –
Crusader Pits – – – 596 2.41 46 2 1.98 0.1 598 2.41 46
Songvang – 527 3.26 55 103 2.63 9 – – – 630 3.17 64
Songvang Pit
Total open-pit 650 3.22 67 1,463 3.29 155 83 3.10 8 2,196 3.26 230
Underground                        
Waroonga – 450
South lode – – – 8 4.04 1 – – – 8 4.04 1
Waroonga – Kim
Lode 442 5.76 82 1,029 7.79 258 80 9.39 24 1,550 7.29 363
Waroonga – Rajah
lode 159 3.95 20 212 4.82 33 56 4.02 7 427 4.40 60
Waroonga – Main
Lode 979 4.11 130 1,117 6.28 226 259 5.99 50 2,355 5.35 405
Waroonga – FBH – – – 1,754 9.58 540 172 8.16 45 1,925 9.45 585
Waroonga –
Cinderella – – – 15 1.11 1 93 4.01 12 108 3.60 13
Redeemer – North
Zone 2 2 5.01 0.3 14 4.09 2 26 4.68 4 42 4.51 6
Redeemer – South
Zone 2 16 4.74 2 23 3.95 3 80 4.68 12 118 4.57 17
Crusader – Claudius – – – 400 6.42 83 3 5.69 1 403 6.43 83
GNH – 200 Series – – – 60 4.63 9 162 3.97 21 222 4.15 30
GNH – 500 Series – – – 529 6.78 115 25 5.16 4 554 6.72 120
GNH – Sheba – – – 601 5.89 114 657 5.86 124 1,258 5.88 238
GNH – Upper New
Holland – – – 427 5.16 71 836 4.36 117 1,263 4.64 188
GNH – Upper
Genesis – – – 402 5.85 76 180 5.24 30 582 5.67 106
GNH – New Holland/
Batavia – – – 316 5.93 60 114 3.68 14 430 5.34 74
GNH – NH126 – – – 288 5.81 44 13 3.94 2 301 4.76 46
Total underground 1,597 4.56 234 7,192 7.07 1,634 2,757 5.27 467 11,546 6.29 2,335
Surface                         
Mill Stocks Agnew 56 2.62 5 – – – – – – 56 2.62 5
Total stockpiles 56 2.62 5 – – – – – – 56 2.62 5
Grand total 2,302 4.14 306 8,655 6.43 1,789 2,841 5.20 475 13,798 5.79 2,570

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
48 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Modifying factors
• The Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources are inclusive of Mineral Reserves
• Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of Run of Mine (RoM) grades and tonnages as delivered to the metallurgical processing
facility and are therefore fully diluted 
• Mineral Reserve statement includes only Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral Reserves and
contained within the LoM plan
• Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo regular internal and/or external audits, and any issues identified are rectified at
the earliest opportunity – usually during the current reporting cycle 

      December December December


   Units 2014 2013 2012

Mineral Resource parameters            


US$/oz 1,500 1,500 1,650
Mineral Resource gold price
A$/oz 1,570 1,570 1,650
Exchange rate A$: US$ 1.05 1.05 1.00
Cut-off for underground g/t 2.77 – 4.75 3.31 – 4.34 1.6 – 3.7
Mineral Reserve parameters           
US$/oz 1,300 1,300 1,500
Mineral Reserve gold price
A$/oz 1,370 1,370 1,500
Exchange rate A$: US$ 1.05 1.05 1.00
Cut-off for fresh ore g/t 3.17 – 5.44 4.23 – 4.97 3.1 – 4.4
Mining recovery factor (underground) % 90-95 95 107
MCF % 100 100 100
Dilution underground % 10 10 26
Plant recovery factor % 94.9 96.0 94.5
Processing capacity Mtpa 1.3 1.3 1.3
Pre-2014 all figures are exclusive of Lawlers

Grade tonnage curve


Grade tonnage curves for the underground and open-pit Mineral Resource.

Grade tonnage curve − Underground


16 18.0
14 16.0
12 14.0
Tonnes (millions)

12.0
10
Grade (g/t)

10.0
8
8.0
6
6.0
4 4.0
2 Tonnes above cut-off
2.0
0 0.0 Average grade above cut-off
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cut-off grade (g/t)

Grade tonnage curve − Surface


4 16.0
14.0
3 12.0
Tonnes (millions)

10.0
Grade (g/t)

2 8.0
6.0
1 4.0
2.0 Tonnes above cut-off
0 0.0 Average grade above cut-off
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cut-off grade (g/t)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 49

Agnew Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves
The Mineral Reserve estimate for Agnew is based on an appropriately detailed and engineered LoM plan. All design and scheduling
work is undertaken to an appropriate level of detail by experienced engineers using appropriate mine planning software. The planning
process incorporates appropriate modifying factors and the use of cut-off grades and other techno-economic investigations.

The current Operational Plan reflects mining at both the Waroonga and New Holland Complex’s, with mining from the Kim South, Main
North, FBH, 500 Series and Sheba areas.

MINERAL RESERVE CLASSIFICATION


   Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                             

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit and underground                  


Proved 258 327 894 8.92 6.81 6.16 74 72 177
Probable 3,299 3,815 4,911 7.41 7.15 6.12 786 878 966
Total underground 3,556 4,142 5,805 7.52 7.13 6.12 860 949 1,143
Surface                  
Proved 56 62 222 2.62 1.80 1.54 5 4 11
Total surface 56 62 222 2.62 1.80 1.54 5 4 11
Grand total 3,612 4,204 6,027 7.44 7.05 5.96 865 953 1,154
Mineral Reserves for 2012 represent Agnew only as this was prior to the acquisition of Lawlers.

MINERAL RESERVE CLASSIFICATION PER MINING AREA


  Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
                             

Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Mining area (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz)

Underground                  
Waroonga – FBH – – – 1,193 9.08 348 1,193 9.08 348
Waroonga – Kim 206 9.68 64 753 7.48 181 959 7.95 245
Waroonga – Edmunds 10 9.85 3 294 6.21 59 303 6.33 62
Waroonga – Main – – – 146 6.59 31 146 6.59 31
Waroonga – Main South 13 4.66 2 345 6.20 69 358 6.14 71
Waroonga – Total 229 9.37 69 2,731 7.84 688 2,959 7.96 757
GNH – BA500 – – – 185 5.84 35 185 5.84 35
GNH – GI500 29 4.99 5 318 5.12 52 347 5.11 57
GNH – NH Upper – – – 16 6.79 4 16 6.79 4
GNH – NH 126 – – – 24 5.29 4 24 5.29 4
GNH – Sheba – – – 25 4.15 3 25 4.15 3
Genesis New Holland – Total 29 4.99 5 568 5.37 98 597 5.35 103
Total underground 258 8.88 74 3,299 7.41 786 3,556 7.52 860
Surface                  
Agnew Surface Stockpiles 56 2.62 5 – – – 56 2.62 5
Total surface 56 2.62 5 – – – 56 2.62 5
Grand total 314 7.77 78 3,299 7.41 786 3,612 7.44 865

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
50 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Factors that affected Mineral Factors that affected Mineral


Resource reconciliation  Reserve reconciliation
year-on-year year-on-year

• Mined depletion • Increase in cut-off grade for Kim, Edmunds, FBH and
• Increases in cut-off grade for Waroonga, Redeemer, Main lodes 
Crusader, Miranda and Songvang Complexes • Decrease in cut-off grade for all New Holland Complex
• Decrease in cut-off grade for New Holland Complex lodes
Mineral Resources • Mineral Resource modelling – changes to the Kim, FBH,
• Down grade of the Redeemer Deeps and Fairy Edmunds, Main North and 500 Series interpretation
Land Mineral Resource to mineral inventory models
• Mineral Resource modelling – specifically the minimum • Discovery (FBH)
mining width applied for underground resources within
the Waroonga, Redeemer, Crusader, Miranda and
Songvang Complexes
• Discovery (FBH)

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
4,000 3,656 224 1,200
3,500 1,000
953
(265) (64) 173 36 865
3,000 (313) 2,570
2,500 800 (19)
(668)
2,000 600 (278)
1,500 400
1,000
500 200
0 0
Inclusions /
Exclusions

Inclusions /
Exclusions
Economic
factors

Discovery

Resource
modelling

Gold price

Costs

Discovery

Resource
modelling
Mined
depletions

Mined
depletions
Dec 2014

Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Dec 2013

Schematic north-south cross-section through the New Holland/Genesis ore bodies and mine workings

South North

Hidden Secret Pit New Holland Pit Genesis Pit

1 400 RL

Cinderella
Himitsu
200 Series
500 Series
1 000 RL

Batavia 500

Sheba

600 Series 600 RL


1 0500m N

1 3500m N
1 1500m N

1 2500m N

700 Series
9 500N

Mineral Reserve sensitivity  Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold − Moz)


To illustrate the impact of fluctuations in gold price and 1.2
1.0
exchange rates on the current declaration, Agnew, with the
0.8
incorporation of Lawlers has generated sensitivities with respect
0.6
to Mineral Reserves. The following graph indicates the Managed
0.4
Mineral Reserve sensitivity at -15% -10%, -5%, +5%, +10%, 0.2
+15% and +25% to the base (A$1,370) reserve gold price. 0.0
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25%
These sensitivities (other than for the base case) are not Base gold price (A$1,370/oz)
supported by detailed plans and depletion schedules. They
should only be considered on an indicative basis; specifically as
such sensitivities assume 100% selectivity, without any operating
cost increases.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 51

Agnew Gold Mine (continued)

Schematic north-south 10 500

cross-section through the 450


South
Waroonga ore bodies.

Main
Waroonga North North
Main
South 10 000
Kath Rajah

Yeoman

FBH

9 500

Main South
Deeps

Link
Kim South/ 9 000
Edmunds
41 000

40 500

40 000

39 500

39 000
Competent Persons
Internal technical reviews have been conducted on the Agnew GM assets by the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-
time employees of Gold Fields Limited

Peter Johansen 
Mineral Resource Manager
BSc (Hons) Geology. AusIMM membership number 108674.

Industry experience: 26 years in exploration and mining in Australia and PNG. Commodities: gold, nickel, iron ore. Eight years
at Agnew.

Neil Morriss
Senior Planning Engineer
BEng (Hons) Mining Engineering. MAusIMM membership number 208320.

Industry experience: 11 years in mining in Australia. Commodities: gold, nickel, diamonds. One year at Agnew.

Robert Urie
Regional Mining Engineer
BEng (Hons) Mining Engineering. MAusIMM membership number 111309.

Industry experience: 19 years in mining in Australia. Commodities: gold, base metals, uranium. Four years at Agnew.

Paul Forman
Senior Resource Geologist
BSc (Geology), Postgrad (Mining). MAusIMM membership number 100163.

Industry experience: 31 years in mining in Australia. Commodities: gold, copper, iron ore, manganese, bauxite. Three years at
Agnew.

Jamie Logan
Resource Geologist
BSc (Geology). GAIG membership number 5523.

Industry experience: six years in mining in Australia. Commodities: gold. Six years at Agnew.

Shaun Hackett
Principal Resource Geologist 
BSc Geology, MAusIMM membership number 211644.

Industry experience: 24 years in exploration and mining in Australia and globally. Commodities: gold, nickel, iron ore. Four
years’ experience with Agnew

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
52 regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Darlot Gold Mine


www.goldfields.com

Darlot’s 2014 focus was on self-funding a meaningful exploration programme to replace production depletion and to extend the
LoM through discovery of a ‘game changer’ ore body capable of delivering a 15% free cash flow margin. An increased exploration
budget in 2014 of A$8m focussed on two prospective areas, Lords South Lower (LSL) and Centenary Depth Analogue (CDA) with
the objective of sourcing new quality mining fronts to deliver a franchise asset. Another year of mining in 2015 was defined at LSL,
creating the opportunity for an additional A$7m exploration spend in 2015.

Drilling at CDA has intersected a strongly mineralised sequence with similar characteristics to the previously mined Centenary deposit
showing potential for development of another significant resource. Additional near-mine targets include further extensions to LSL and
the CDA.

Darlot is mine-constrained and is currently targeting production of approximately 83koz in 2015. Success will be rooted in proving up
and converting inventory and exploration targets into Mineral Reserves, cost leadership and production efficiency to maximise value
through the plant.

General location 

Darlot is located in the Eastern Goldfields Province of the Yilgarn Craton approximately 55km east of Leinster or 110km north of
Leonora and approximately 900km northeast of Perth in Western Australia. It sits at an elevation of 465m above sea level (amsl) and is
located at latitude 27°53’32” S and longitude 121°16’16” E.

Asset fundamentals 
The Darlot tenure consists of 27 mining leases and four prospecting licences. These tenements cover
LICENCE STATUS AND an area of 11,358ha. Darlot is located on the Melrose Pastoral Lease in the Mount Malcolm District
HOLDINGS of the Mount Margaret Mineral Field. The pastoral lease (243,000ha) on which the mine is located is
owned and managed by Gold Fields.

OPERATIONAL Darlot is currently mining from two underground areas (Darlot and Centenary), accessed via
INFRASTRUCTURE AND declines. In addition, there are centralised administrative offices, engineering workshops and one
MINERAL PROCESSING CIP processing plant (~0.8Mtpa capacity).

The climate is semi-arid, however, no extreme climate conditions are experienced that may affect
CLIMATE
mining operations.

Orogenic greenstone gold deposits hosted in a number of different styles of lodes. Primarily all of
the Darlot deposits broadly occur at the intersections between structures and stratigraphy, however,
DEPOSIT TYPE
there are subtle differences in alteration and mineralisation that control the local disposition of metal
occurrence in thickness, continuity and mineralising texture.

LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM)  Ongoing exploration could extend the Life-of-Mine, which currently extends to mid-2016 (18 months).

In October 2013 the Darlot mine was ISO 14001 accredited. Darlot is certified as fully compliant
ENVIRONMENTAL/
to the International Cyanide Management Code (ICMC). In Q3 2014 Darlot was ohsas 18001
HEALTH AND SAFETY 
accredited. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 53

Brief history  Continued exploration confirmed down-dip extensions to


the Darlot lodes. This work culminated with underground
Gold was first discovered in the Lake Darlot region in an alluvial
development and mining of the Darlot lodes in October 1995.
field in late 1894. Initial exploration and production focussed on
readily extractable gold from the alluvial deposits but production During August 1996, a drill hole intersected a 33 metre section
from these areas is poorly documented. grading 8.0g/t Au. This discovery drill hole for the Centenary
ore body was approximately 1.2km east of the Darlot open-pit.
The discovery of high-grade quartz vein hosted deposits and
Underground development to the Centenary ore body from the
the depletion of the alluvial fields changed the exploration focus
Darlot workings was initiated during December 1996.
in the area. Mines at the time included King of the Hills, Saint
George, Monte Christo and Zangbar. These were all located In May 1998, Homestake Mining Company acquired Plutonic
within the current Darlot tenement M37/155. Resources Group and in June 2001 Barrick merged with
Homestake. In October 2013 Gold Fields acquired the Darlot
In 1935, a syndicate undertook limited drilling of the Zangbar
mine and tenement package from Barrick.
and Monte Christo quartz lodes. The high-grade lateritic gold
section of Monte Christo was mined by open-pit in the 1950s. Key developments
Modern exploration commenced in the Project area in the • Rapidly returned to solvency post the acquisition
late 1970s and focussed on a re-evaluation of historical • Approximate 30% improvement in mined grade year-on-year
mining camps, as well as extensions and repetitions of known due to reduced dilution and more selective stoping to deliver
mineralised veins. Interest in the area was renewed in the mid- higher margin ounces
1980s. From 1986 to 1988 Sundowner Minerals NL undertook • Maiden CDA Oval Inferred Resource reported
an aggressive exploration programme around the Monte • High-grade nuggety ore system that remains open-ended
Christo area and successfully delineated sufficient resources • Prospective and under-explored near mine and regional
to commence open cut mining at Monte Christo and Darlot tenement package
in 1988. Open cut mining continued until December 1995 • Exploration in 2014 focussed on replacing production depletion
and yielded approximately 400,000oz of gold. In the interim, and reserve growth to provide critical mass and flexibility
Plutonic Resources Group acquired Sundowner Minerals NL • Confirmed presence of Centenary Depth Analogue, which
in December 1992. will be the key focus for exploration and resource definition
programmes in 2015

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
54 Regions, operations and projects

330000E
325000E

335000E
N

6925000N 6925000N

Darlot Airstrip

6920000N 6920000N

Darlot Pit

Darlot UG Offices Darlot UG

Darlot Administration

Mine Village

Darlot Mill

6915000N 6915000N

Melrose Station

Road to Weebo
(Darlot – Weebo Road)

6910000N 6910000N

PLAN SHOWING DARLOT MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014


0 1 2 3

Kilometres
Co-ordinate System: Map Grid of Australia Zone 51
(Geodetic Datum of Australia 1994)
330000E
325000E

335000E

Reference
U/G Mines Waste Dump
Towns Open Pits Inactive
Buildings Stockpiles
Offices Tailings/Leach Pad
Roads
Darlot Mining Lease

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 55

Darlot Gold Mine (continued)

Operating statistics
  Historic performance
           

  Units C2014 C2013 C2012 C2011

Underground mining          
Total mined kt 695 876 876 963
– Waste mined kt 165 189 170 179
– Ore mined kt 530 687 706 784
Mined grade g/t 4.96 3.80 4.35 3.76
Processing          
Tonnes treated kt 525 746 853 769
Head grade g/t 5.12 3.54 4.09 3.76
Yield g/t 4.96 3.28 3.82 3.48
Plant recovery factor % 95.2 92.6 93.5 92.5
Total gold production koz 83.6 79.8 105 86
Financials          
Exchange rate (annual average) USD:A$ 0.90 1.03 0.97 0.97
Operating cost A$/oz 1,085 1,132 997 1,202
Capital expenditure A$/oz 195 81 220 403
All-in Cost (AIC) A$/oz 1,353 1,132    
A$/oz 1,353 1,169 1,345 1,611
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC)
US$/oz 1,222 1,132    
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 0.4 1.0 2.4   
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 7.36 5.07 4.35 3.76
Mineral Reserves Moz 0.10 0.16 0.43 0.43
Rounding off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.
December 2013 production figures are inclusive of Gold Fields (Q4) and Barrick (Q1 – Q3), while the unit costs are only Q4.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
56 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Local geology  Mining


Darlot Mine is located within the Eastern Goldfields Province The 2015 mine plan is focussed on the underground Darlot and
of the Archean-aged Yilgarn Craton in Western Australia. The Centenary ore systems, as well as setting up access and take off
Darlot-Centenary deposit is located within the Mount Margaret points for the Centenary Depth Analogue (CDA) area. 
Mineral Field which lies at the southern end of the Yandal
Greenstone Belt. Mining methods
Mining is via a combination of long-hole open stoping, room and
Gold mineralisation at Darlot Mine is associated with quartz veins pillar and narrow vein long-hole stoping. All mining is accessed
and alteration halos controlled by major structures or secondary via two declines from the base of the Darlot open-pit. Paste fill is
splays and cross-linking structures. The Darlot deposit has been utilised to backfill open stopes allowing maximum extraction of
differentiated into two separate entities, namely the Darlot lodes the lode system.
and Centenary ore body. The Centenary ore body is located
some 1.2km east of the Darlot open-pit and down dip from the Mine planning and scheduling
Darlot lode extensions. The 2015 Operational Plan is dominated by underground mining
from the Centenary lode and accessing the new Lords South
In the Darlot lodes, gold mineralisation occurs within and around
Lower mining area. The mine schedule is sequenced in detail
quartz laminar and sheeted quartz veins in local dilation zones
and typically has only two stoping fronts open at any one time.
along the Darlot thrust, in addition to sub-horizontal extensional
quartz veins in felsic volcanic and intrusive rocks above the At Darlot, the stope design takes practical stope layouts into
thrust. consideration, as well as planning for mining losses in pillars
or other parts of the resource excluded for technical reasons.
The Centenary ore body has been defined from approximately
Dilution material is included in the stope design. Ore losses
150m to 700m below surface. Gold mineralisation occurs within
can occur when material cannot be practically extracted from
sub-horizontal to 20° westerly dipping stacked quartz veins
the stopes. Stope shapes were assessed using updated cut-
bounded to the west by the oval fault and to the east by the
off  grades.
Lords fault. These reverse faults are marked by banded quartz
veins dipping 50° to the west. A ground management plan is in place together with a
monitoring system to manage seismicity and potential
Exploration and resource definition drilling
improvements to the production sequencing to further
There is considerable endowment potential within the mitigate risk.
current tenement holdings to add significantly to the Mineral
Resources and Mineral Reserves, through a combination of Projects
in-mine resource extensions to known positions and near-mine
A number of business improvement projects continue with the
exploration. In terms of the extent of its tenement holdings
primary aim of improving operational results through driving
and the exploration undertaken thus far, Darlot cannot yet be
greater efficiencies, reducing costs and increasing mine
considered advanced in exploration terms due to the relatively
flexibility.
shallow drilling undertaken outside of the present mine footprint.
Recent drilling and geological studies continue to highlight The operation continues to examine and review the possibility of
the potential of the Darlot area to deliver new high-grade ore opportunistic exploitation of small-scale open pittable deposits
sources in close proximity to existing mine infrastructure. with-low strip ratios for supplementary mill feed. In this regard
smaller open-pit opportunities continue to be assessed for
Mine exploration for the 12 months to December 2014 focussed
shallow oxide and supergene ore that could be brought into
on in-mine resource definition and near-mine targeting of
production quickly and at minimal operating cost.
geophysical and geochemical anomalies. A key target for
2014, the Centenary Depth analogue (CDA), was successfully Future exploration will focus within and immediately around
intersected in a number of holes drilled from surface and will be the Darlot mine area. The objective is to define and bring into
the focus of underground resource definition drilling in 2015. production additional high-grade ore sources from the CDA.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 57

Darlot Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves Mineral Resources


The Mineral Resources are classified as Measured, Indicated
The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves have been
or Inferred. Mineral Resource categories are assigned with
updated using the current Gold Fields planning gold
consideration given to geological complexity, grade variance,
price of US$1,500/oz and US$1,300/oz respectively and
drill hole intersection spacing, and mining development.
reported in accordance with the SAMREC Code. The
The impacts of year-on-year changes are covered in the
December 2014 Mineral Resources have been stated inclusive
reconciliation section.
of  Mineral Reserves.

Mineral Resource classification


  Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
             

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13

Underground            
Measured 18 563 9.42 5.12 6 93
Indicated 773 863 7.37 5.38 183 149
Inferred 348 175 6.61 5.07 74 29
Total underground 1,140 1,601 7.17 5.26 263 271
Surface            
Total surface – –  – –  – –
Grand total 1,140 1,601 7.17 5.26 263 271
Pre-2013, Mineral Resources are not shown as this was prior to the acquisition of Darlot.

MINERAL RESOURCE PER MINING AREA


   Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource
                          

   Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Area (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz)

Centenary 18 9.42 6 474 6.87 104 217 6.28 44 709 6.76 154
Lords South Lower – – – 253 8.24 67 76 5.82 14 329 7.68 81
CDA Oval – – – – – – 38 10.89 13 38 10.89 13
Darlot – – – 46 7.66 11 18 4.86 3 64 6.88 14
Total Darlot UG 18 9.42 6 773 7.37 183 348 6.61 74 1,140 7.17 263
Surface                        
Surface stockpiles – – – – – – – – – – – –
Grand total 18 9.42 6 773 7.37 183 348 6.61 74 1,140 7.17 263

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
58 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Modifying factors
• The declared Mineral Resources for December 2014 are • The Mineral Reserve statement includes only Measured and
inclusive of Mineral Reserves Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral
• Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades and Reserves and contained within the LoM plan
tonnages as delivered to the metallurgical processing facility • Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo regular
and are therefore fully diluted internal and/or external audits, and any issues identified are
rectified at the earliest opportunity – usually during the current
reporting cycle 

  Units December 2014  December 2013*

Mineral Resource parameters       


US$/oz 1,500 1,500
Mineral Resource gold price
A$/oz 1,570 1,429
Exchange rate A$: US$ 1.05 1.05
Cut-off for mill feed g/t 1.00 1.00
Cut-off for underground g/t 3.7 3.56
Mineral Reserve parameters      
US$/oz 1,300 1,350
Mineral Reserve gold price*
A$/oz 1,370 1,350
Exchange rate A$: US$  1.05 1.00
Cut-off for fresh ore  g/t 1.9 1.68
Cut-off for mill feed underground g/t 4.3 3.76
Mining recovery factor (underground) % 90 95
MCF % 100 100
Dilution underground % 15 10
Plant recovery factor % 95.5 95.5
Processing capacity Mtpa 0.8 0.8
* Barrick used variable exchange rates for Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves. 

Grade tonnage curve


Grade tonnage curves for the underground and open-pit Mineral Resource.

Grade tonnage curve − Underground


18.0 16.0
16.0 14.0
14.0 12.0
Tonnes (millions)

12.0
Grade (g/t)

10.0
10.0
8.0
8.0
6.0
6.0
4.0 4.0
2.0 Tonnes above cut-off
2.0
0.0 0.0 Average grade above cut-off
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cut-off grade (g/t)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 59

Darlot Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves
The terms and definitions are those given in the SAMREC Code 2007. The current Operational Plan has mining occurring in the
Centenary and Lords South Lower areas with minor activities in the upper Darlot mining area.

Mineral Reserve classification


  Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                    

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13

Open-pit and underground                  


Proved – 262 – 5.60 – 47
Probable 360 679 7.36 4.89 85 107
Total open-pit and underground 360 941 7.36 5.09 85 154
Proved stockpiles  – 10 – 2.80 – 1
Grand total 360 951 7.36 5.07 85 155

Mineral Reserve classification per mining area


   Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
                             

   Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Mining area (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz)

Underground                  
Centenary – – – 183 6.42 38 183 6.42 38
Lords South Lower – – – 177 8.61 48 177 8.61 48
Total underground – – – 360 7.36 85 360 7.36 85
Surface                  
Surface stockpiles – – – – – – – – –
Grand total – – – 360 7.36 85 360 7.36 85

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
60 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Factors that affected the Factors that affected the


Mineral Resource reconciliation Mineral Reserve reconciliation 
year-on-year year-on-year
• Decrease in ounces due to increased cut-off grade • Depletion by mining
• Gains through exploration (discovery) • Increased cut off grades adversely impacted ounces but
• Losses from narrow lodes through changes in the head grade improved due to increased selectivity 
application of the minimum mining width to underground • Removal of marginal remnants from the plan
resources • Significant improvements to Mineral Reserve calculation
protocols replacing legacy models
• Positive operational practices increasing mined grade
subsequent to acquisition 

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
300 271 112 200
263
250 154
(18)
150
200 48
(84) 85
150 (17) 100
100 (38)
(79)
50
50
0 0
Inclusions /
Exclusions

Inclusions /
Exclusions
Economic
factors

Discovery

Resource
modelling

Mined
depletions

Gold price

Costs

Discovery

Resource
modelling
Mined
depletions

Dec 2014

Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Dec 2013

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 61

Darlot Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserve sensitivity


To illustrate the impact of fluctuations in gold price and
exchange rates on the current declaration, Darlot has generated Competent Persons
sensitivities with respect to Mineral Reserves. The following Internal technical reviews have been conducted on the
graph indicates the Managed Mineral Reserve sensitivity at Darlot GM assets by the Competent Persons as listed,
who are full-time employees of Gold Fields Limited.
-15% -10%, -5%, +5%, +10%, +15% and +25% to the base
(A$1,370) reserve gold price. Pascal Blampain
Mineral Resource Manager
These sensitivities (other than for the base case) are not
BSc Geology. AusIMM membership number 205882.
supported by detailed plans and depletion schedules. They
AIG membership 2749.
should only be considered on an indicative basis; specifically as
such sensitivities assume 100% selectivity, without any operating Industry experience: 21 years in exploration and
cost increases. mining in Australia and PNG. Commodities: gold, base
metals, mineral sands. Six years Archean gold.

Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold − Moz) Robert Urie


0.1 Regional Mining Engineer
BEng (Hons) Mining Engineering. MAusIMM
membership number 111309.

Industry experience: 19 years in mining in Australia.


Commodities: gold, base metals, uranium. Two years in
regional role.
0.0
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25%
Stephanie Gotley
Base gold price (A$1,370/oz)
Senior Resource Geologist
BSc (Hons) Geology, Grad. Cert. Geostatistics. AusIMM
membership number 211515. AIG membership
number 2780.

Industry experience: 20 years in mining and consulting


in Australia, including 10 years in Archean gold.

Shaun Hackett
Principal Resource Geologist 
BSc Geology, MAusIMM membership number 211644.

Industry experience: 24 years in exploration and


mining in Australia and globally. Commodities: gold,
nickel, iron ore. Twenty years in Archean gold

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
62 regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Granny Smith Gold Mine 


www.goldfields.com

The mine is characterised by a word-class, high-grade ore body that shows good continuity and significant upside potential for Mineral
Resource growth beyond current mining and brownfield generative exploration. The Wallaby underground Mineral Resource ounces
increased by 67% in 2014 as a result of a very successful resource definition and extensional drilling campaign. Mineral Resource to
Mineral Reserve conversion at Wallaby remains a priority to underpin the mining mix and production flexibility needed to deliver the
required cash flow margin. Granny Smith’s strategy is to discover and develop new and extensional Mineral Reserves within its flagship
Wallaby underground mine and from prospective and relatively unexplored tenements.

General location

Granny Smith is situated within the Yilgarn Craton at an elevation of 400m above sea level (amsl) and located at latitude 28°51’09” S
and longitude 122°18’35” E, and is located approximately 400km northeast of the town of Kalgoorlie in the Eastern Goldfields of
Western Australia in the Laverton District. 

Asset fundamentals
The Granny Smith Gold Mine (GSM) is owned by GSM Mining Company Pty Ltd a wholly owned
subsidiary of Gold Fields Ltd. This entity came into being on 1 October 2013 following Gold Fields’
LICENCE STATUS AND
acquisition of the asset from Barrick Corporation. GSM controls exploration and mineral rights
HOLDINGS
over a total area of 64,267 hectares (total of granted tenements) and has security of tenure for all
current exploration and mining leases that contribute to future Mineral Reserves.

Granny Smith is currently mining four lenses from the Wallaby ore body (Z70, Z80, Z90 and Z100),
OPERATIONAL accessed from a single decline. Mining administration and maintenance is located at the Wallaby mine.
INFRASTRUCTURE Ore is processed at the 3.5 Mtpa capacity Granny Smith CIP processing plant (3.5Mtpa capacity) under
campaign milling conditions and is located 15km east of the Wallaby underground mine.

The climate is semi-arid and temperatures vary from an average minimum of 4°C in June to an
CLIMATE average maximum of 36°C in January. The average annual rainfall total is 220mm. No extreme
climate conditions are experienced that may affect mining operations.

Orogenic greenstone gold deposits hosted in a number of different styles of lodes. The Granny
Smith lodes comprise vein stock works localised by a northerly trending shear at the margin of a
DEPOSIT TYPE
granodiorite. The Wallaby lodes are flat lying alteration zones hosted within magnetite amphibole
altered conglomerate.

Ongoing extensional and brownfields exploration continues and will sustain an extended LoM
LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM) beyond current reporting. It is estimated that the current Mineral Reserves will be depleted in
2019 (five years).

ENVIRONMENTAL/ In 2014, GSM achieved Cyanide Code re-certification, ISO 14001 Certification and OHSAS 18001
HEALTH AND SAFETY Certification. GSM is in compliance with all environmental legislation.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 63

Brief history Key developments


The Goanna and Granny Smith deposits were discovered • Robust Wallaby deposit continues to demonstrate consistent
in 1979 by CSR Ltd. In 1988 Placer Pacific acquired CSR’s capacity to replace and grow the Mineral Resource and
60% interest with the remaining 40% held by Delta Gold NL.  Mineral Reserve base
• Positive results for extensions to Wallaby Z100 to the south
In 1989, mining at the GSM commenced in the Granny Smith pit, and Z110/120
and continued in subsequent years with the development of the • Strong 1.4 million ounce increase in Wallaby underground
Goanna pit, the Windich pit and nearby satellite pits. First gold resources through exploration drilling and Mineral Resource
was poured in 1990. conversion during 2014
• Life-of-Mine based only on current Reserves extends to
In 1992 the Keringal and Sunrise deposits were discovered
2019 (five years) although ongoing exploration and resource
18km and 34km south of Granny Smith respectively, with ore
conversion is profiled to extend life, typical of orogenic style
production from both commencing in 1994. The Wallaby deposit
ore bodies 
was discovered in 1998, 11km south-west of Granny Smith, with
• Exploration drilling has expanded the footprint and resource
first ore delivered to the mill in November 2001. 
base of the Z90, Z100, and Z110/120 lodes, and identified
Barrick acquired 100% of Placer Dome shares on 20 January new positions down to the Z150 position 
2006. The Wallaby open-pit was mined from October 2001 • The Granny Smith resource development strategy will focus
until December 2006 and produced 13.6Mt at 3.44g/t Au for on identifying the potential of the Wallaby system down to
1.5 million ounces of gold. Underground mining at Wallaby the Z150 level. In addition, the high-grade Inferred resource
commenced in December 2005 and is ongoing. domains in Z100 south and north-east are being infill drilled to
convert to Measured and Indicated resources for conversion
Gold Fields acquired 100% of the Granny Smith Gold Mine on to reserves 
1 October 2013 as part of the purchase of the Yilgarn South
Operations.

Granny Smith schematic ore zone model looking west

Zone 250

Zone 60
Zone 70

Zone 80
1,200
metres

Zone 90

Ore zones

Zone 100

Actinolite-magnetite alteration pipe


Zone 110
Zone 120
View to the West

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
64 regions, operations and projects

420000E

440000E

460000E
N

Laverton Townsite

Mount Weld
Airstrip
6820000N
6820000N

Core Farm/Exploration Office

Granny Smith Administration Goanna Pit

Phoenix Pit Granny Smith


Mill
Granny Smith Pit

Mine Village Windich Pit

Wallaby UG

Wallaby Pit

Wallaby UG Offices

Lake Carey

Keringal Pit

6800000N 6800000N

Jubilee Pit

6780000N 6780000N

Road to Sunrise Dam

PLAN SHOWING GRANNY SMITH MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014


0 1 3 5
Kilometres
Map Grid of Australia Co-ordinate System
460000E
420000E

440000E

Reference
U/G Mines Waste Dump
Buildings Open-pit Inactive
Roads Stockpiles
Granny Smith Mining Lease Tailings Dams

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 65

Granny Smith Gold Mine (continued)

Operating statistics
   Historic performance
           

  Units C2014 C2013 C2012 C2011

Underground mining          
Total mined  kt 1,761 1,887 1,928 1,676
– Waste mined  kt 253 446 435 448
– Ore mined kt 1,508 1,442 1,492 1,228
Mined grade g/t 7.21 5.0 5.10 5.61
Processing          
Tonnes treated kt 1,472 1,516 1,438 1,187
Head grade g/t 7.17 5.29 5.16 5.66
Yield g/t 6.66 4.74 4.61 5.11
Plant recovery factor % 92.5 89.6 89.4 90.3
Total gold production koz 315.2 231 213 195
Financials          
Operating cost A$/oz 642 810 908 687
A$ million 65.2      
Capital expenditure
A$/oz 207      
A$/oz 896 917 1,349 1,339
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC)
US$/oz 809      
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 4.5 4.1 31.5 3.6
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 6.02 6.34 1.84 5.39
Mineral Reserves Moz 0.87 0.83 1.86 0.63
Rounding off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
66 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Local geology Mining


The Granny Smith region is dominated by the Mt Margaret Dome The current operations consist of the Wallaby underground mine
in the northwest and the Kirgella Dome in the southeast. These with mining occurring in four ore lenses (Z70, Z80, Z90 and
domes are flanked to the east and west by north-northwest- Z100), which form the basis for the 2015 Operational Plan. 
striking shear zones, with the central zone between the two
domes being dominated by north- to north-northeast-striking Mining methods
sigmoidal shear zones. These distinctly different strikes to the Access to the Wallaby underground mine is via a portal
shear zones developed early in the tectonic evolution, and established within the completed Wallaby open-pit. The mine
resulted in a favourable architecture for late-stage orogenic gold operation is trackless, with truck haulage from underground
mineralisation at Wallaby and Granny Smith. via the pit ramp to the surface. The Wallaby underground mine
is currently designed to exploit the stacked mineralised lodes
The majority of gold mineralisation at the Wallaby deposit (Z70, Z80, Z90 and Z100) to a depth of 1.0km. 
is contained within an actinolite-magnetite alteration pipe.
It crosscuts the host conglomerate and the majority of Two primary underground mining methods are used, with minor
magmatic intrusions, and overprints the actinolite-magnetite adjustments to suit localised geometry; Inclined Room and
alteration. Gold occurs along micro-fractures within pyrite.  Pillar (IRP) is used in areas with a moderate dip (10° to 35°)
and moderate width zones (four to six metres), and Transverse
Exploration and resource definition drilling Long-hole Stoping (TLHS) is used in zones, which are thicker
Exploration during 2014 focussed on resource conversion and (six metres to 15m) with variable dips. Two other mining methods
extensions in the Wallaby deposit. Regional exploration was are used to a lesser extent: Narrow Vein Long-hole Stoping may
recommenced deploying geophysical surveys on the Lake be utilised in some areas with the benefit of reduced planned
Carey, Barnicoat and Boomer environs, and drilling at the footwall dilution, and Bulk Long-hole Stoping is used in thicker
Keringal, Jubilee, and Platypus prospects. zones (15m plus) under varying dip conditions.

In mine exploration drilling in 2014 resulted in extensions of the Mine planning and scheduling
Z100 lode a further 130m to the south. The lode remains open At Wallaby, the mine design takes practical stope layouts into
to the south. In mine drilling also continued the expansion of consideration, as well as planning for mining losses in barrier
the current footprints to Z110 and Z120, with selected holes pillars and stope pillars, or other parts of the resource excluded
extended to frame the Z150 position within the Wallaby system. for geotechnical, accessibility or economic reasons. The
This programme, consisting of 16 new diamond drill holes, plus production scheduling uses rates based on historical mining
extending five Z100 south holes, has successfully extended performance for Z70, Z80 and Z90 and were matched
the footprint for Zones 110/120 to 800m by 300m, as well as appropriately for Z100.
identifying numerous new potentially economic mineralised
zones between the Z120 and Z150 positions. Projects

Initial drill programmes commenced at the Keringal, Jubilee and Although the Granny Smith mill received significant upgrades
Platypus projects with two reverse circulation drill holes and post the acquisition to reinstall structural integrity and improve
10 diamond drill holes completed. Further work is planned for operating systems and metal recovery, a number of projects are
Keringal and Jubilee. in place to maintain the performance of the mill going forward.
In mine exploration will focus on determining the extent of the
Geophysical surveys to screen tenements were completed Wallaby deposit to Z150, while providing information required for
on Lake Carey, Barnicoat and the Boomer prospects. These the commencement of a scoping study on potential extraction
comprised the completion of detailed gravity surveying on Lake and ore handling methods at these depths.
Carey and the Barnicoat tenements and sub-audio magnetics
(SAM) surveying at Boomer and selected Lake Carey targets. Business improvement priorities encompass improving stope
metal recovery and material movement efficiencies for the
loading and trucking fleet.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 67

Granny Smith Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves Mineral Resources


The Mineral Resources are classified as Measured, Indicated or
The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves were updated as
Inferred, as described in the SAMREC Code. Mineral Resource
of December 2014 and used a gold price of AU$1,570/oz and
categories are assigned with consideration given to geological
AU$1,370/oz respectively in accordance to the SAMREC Code
complexity, grade variance, drill hole intersection spacing, and
2007. The December 2014 Mineral Resources have been stated
mining development.
inclusive of Mineral Reserves. Geological and evaluation models
have been updated as at December 2014 to reflect the latest
available data sets.

Mineral Resource Classification


Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                    

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13

Open-pit and underground            


Measured 1,484 581 7.39 7.02 353 131
Indicated 8,346 32,275 6.52 2.46 1,749 2,548
Inferred 7,472 3,294 6.55 5.33 1,574 565
Total open-pit and underground 17,302 36,150 6.61 2.79 3,676 3,243
Surface            
Measured stockpiles 96 50 6.50 6.47 20 10
Total surface 96 50 6.50 6.47 20 10
Grand total 17,398 36,199 6.61 2.80 3,696 3,254

Mineral Resource Classification per Mining Area


  Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource
                         

  Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Area (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz)

Open-pit                        
Granny Smith – – – 92 7.59 23 217 4.32 30 309 5.29 53
Total open-pit – – – 92 7.59 22 217 4.32 30 309 5.29 53
Underground                        
Granny Smith – – – 1,016 5.04 164 267 3.20 27 1,282 4.65 192
Wallaby                        
Zone 250 8 4.41 1 94 5.38 16 – – – 101 5.30 17
Zone 60 78 5.02 13 – – – – – – 78 5.02 13
Zone 70 211 4.91 33 269 4.14 36 105 4.09 14 584 4.41 83
Zone 80 331 5.95 63 766 5.56 137 41 4.95 7 1,138 5.65 207
Zone 90 771 8.23 204 2,264 6.54 476 423 5.07 69 3,458 6.73 749
Zone 100 86 13.90 38 3,846 7.26 898 2,614 6.05 508 6,546 6.86 1,445
Zone 110/120 – – – – – – 3,807 7.51 919 3,807 7.51 919
Total underground 1,484 7.39 353 8,254 6.51 1,727 7,255 6.62 1,544 16,993 6.63 3,623
Surface                        
Surface stockpiles 96 6.50 20 – – – – – – 96 6.50 20
Grand total 1,580 7.34 373 8,346 6.52 1,749 7,472 6.55 1,574 17,398 6.61 3,696

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
68 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Modifying factors • Mineral Reserve statement includes only Measured and


• The Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources are inclusive Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral
of Mineral Reserves Reserves and contained within the LoM plan
• Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades and • Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo regular
tonnages as delivered to the metallurgical processing facility internal and/or external audits, and any issues identified are
and are therefore fully diluted rectified at the earliest opportunity – usually during the current
reporting cycle 

  Units December 2014 December 2013

Mineral Resource parameters      


US$/oz 1,500 1,500
Mineral Resource gold price 
A$/oz 1,570 1,429
Exchange rate A$: US$ 1.05 1.05
Cut-off for open-pit g/t 1.04 0.48 – 0.50
Cut-off for underground g/t 3.06 – 3.53 3.44 – 3.92
Mineral Reserve parameters      
US$/oz 1,300 1,350
Mineral Reserve gold price 
A$/oz 1,370 1,350
Exchange rate A$: US$ 1.05 1.00
Cut-off for underground g/t 3.50 – 3.81 3.63 – 4.11
Mining recovery factor (underground) % 91 80 – 95
MCF % 100 100
Dilution underground % 10 2 – 10
Plant recovery factor % 92 88.9
Processing capacity Mtpa 3.5 3.5

Grade tonnage curves


The grade tonnage curve for the underground Mineral Resource is presented below.

Grade tonnage curve − Underground


35 14.0
30 12.0
25 10.0
Tonnes (millions)

Grade (g/t)

20 8.0
15 6.0
10 4.0
5 2.0 Tonnes above cut-off
Average grade above cut-off
0 0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cut-off grade (g/t)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 69

Granny Smith Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves The Mineral Reserves are derived following the generation of
The Mineral Reserve estimate for Granny Smith is based on the LoM plan, supported by a detailed design and schedule
a detailed and engineered LoM plan. All detailed design and that takes account of prevailing geotechnical factors directing
scheduling work is undertaken by experienced engineers using optimal sequencing, cut-off grades, and incorporating
mine planning software. The planning process incorporates appropriate modifying factors. Capital requirements are
modifying factors and the use of cut-off grades and other accommodated in the cash flow model to ensure sustainable
techno-economic investigations. operations over the Life-of-Mine.

The current Operational Plan has mining occurring in four zones


(Z70, Z80, Z90 and Z100) at Wallaby underground.

Mineral Reserve classification


Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                 

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 14 Dec 13

Underground            
Proved 673 257 7.10 5.49 154 45
Probable 3,734 3,809 5.81 6.39 698 783
Total underground 4,408 4,066 6.01 6.33 852 828
Surface            
Proved 96 50 6.50 6.47 20 10
Total surface 96 50 6.50 6.47 20 10
Grand total 4,503 4,116 6.02 6.34 872 838

Mineral Reserve classification per mining area


Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
                   

Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Mining area (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz)

Wallaby underground                  
Zone 250/60 88 4.22 12 – – – 88 4.22 12
Zone 70 60 3.96 8 65 3.46 7 126 3.70 15
Zone 80 23 4.09 3 293 5.01 47 316 4.94 50
Zone 90 372 7.92 95 1,149 5.68 210 1,520 6.22 304
Zone 100 130 8.72 36 2,227 6.06 434 2,357 6.21 470
Total underground 673 7.10 154 3,734 5.81 698 4,408 6.01 852
Surface                           
Surface stockpiles 96 6.50 20 – – – 96 6.50 20
Total surface 96 6.50 20 – – – 96 6.50 20
Grand total 769 7.03 174 3,734 5.81 698 4,503 6.02 872

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
70 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Factors that affected Factors that affected


Mineral Resource Mineral Reserve
reconciliation year-on-year reconciliation year-on-year
• Mining depletion  • Depletion by mining that occurred from zones 70, 80, 90
• Increase of 1.4Moz to the Wallaby underground Mineral and 100 in Wallaby underground
Resource primarily from resource extension • The ~5% reduction in Wallaby underground grade is
• Decrease of 0.9Moz at the Granny Smith open-pit primarily due to high-grade areas now depleted during
project, following updates to the legacy open-pit mining 2014 through mining in Z80 and Z100; in addition the
optimisations utilising updated but more realistic cost Z100 2014 resource model update also added significant
inputs. new ounces but from, or proximal to intrusive domains at
• Upgrade of 0.25Moz of lower grade material to Mineral a lower average grade than the 2013 resource grade and
Resource following lower cut-off grades defined at the thinner ore zones drive increased planned dilution
Wallaby underground driven through a higher planning • Upgrades to portions of the Inferred Mineral
gold price A$1,500/oz vs. A$1,429/oz. Resource permitting conversion to reserves (~396koz)

Waterfall graphs showing year-on-year changes by category 


Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
4,000 1,464 3,696 1,000
838 396 10 872
3,500 3,254 900
800
3,000
(342) 700
2,500 600
2,000 (690) 500
400 (342) (30)
1,500
300
1,000
200
500 100
0 0
Inclusions /
Exclusions

Stockpile
Economic
factors

Discovery

Resource
modelling

Costs

Resource
modelling
Mined
depletions

Mined
depletions
Dec 2014

Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Dec 2013

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 71

Granny Smith Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserve sensitivity


To illustrate the impact of fluctuations in gold price and
Competent Persons 
exchange rates on the current declaration, Granny Smith
Internal technical reviews have been conducted by
has generated sensitivities with respect to Mineral Reserves.
the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-time
The following graph indicates the Managed Mineral Reserve employees of Gold Fields Limited. 
sensitivity at -15% -10%, -5%, +5%, +10%, +15% and +25%
to the base (A$1,370) reserve gold price. Gary Sparks
Mineral Resource Manager 
These sensitivities (other than for the base case) are not BapplSc, MSc. MAusIMM membership number 108663,
supported by detailed plans and depletion schedules. They GSA membership number 5823.
should only be considered on an indicative basis; specifically
Industry experience: 29 years in exploration and
as such sensitivities assume 100% selectivity, without any
mining in Australia. Commodities: gold, copper, silver,
operating cost increases. lead, zinc. Five years at Granny Smith.

Marko Velezmoro
Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold − Moz)
Senior Engineer: Mining 
1.2
BSc Mining. MAusIMM membership number 305685.
1.0
0.8
Industry experience: 17 years in mining in Australia
0.6 and Peru. Commodities: gold, nickel, zinc, iron ore.
0.4 Three years at Granny Smith. 
0.2
0 Richard Tully
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25%
Superintendent: Resources 
Base gold price (A$1,370/oz)
BSc (Hons). MAusIMM membership number 992513,
AIG membership number 2716.

Industry experience: 12 years in mining and exploration


in Australia and PNG. Commodities: gold, nickel and
PGE. Eight years at Granny Smith. 

Shaun Hackett
Principal Resource Geologist 
BSc Geology, MAusIMM membership number 211644.

Industry experience: 24 years in exploration and mining


in Australia and globally. Commodities: gold, nickel,
iron ore. Two years’ experience with Granny Smith. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
72 regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

St Ives Gold Mine


www.goldfields.com

St Ives is a well-established operation comprising a mix of ‘owner mined’ open-pit and underground operations feeding the Lefroy
CIL mill with a current capacity of 4.7Mtpa.

The tenement holdings are located in the highly prospective Norseman-Wiluna Greenstone Belt and encompasses under-explored
ground that has been recently acquired or is targeted because of innovative new exploration modelling. An appropriately funded
exploration programme continues to be a key anchor to replacing Mineral Reserves and growing operational flexibility going forward.
The new Invincible open-pit represents a major discovery and has emphasised the high prospectivity of the Speedway corridor which
is prioritised in the 2015 exploration campaign.

General location

The St Ives operations extend from 5km to 25km south-southwest of the town of Kambalda in Western Australia, approximately 630km
east of Perth at latitude 31°12’S and longitude 121°40’E. The nearest major settlement is the town of Kalgoorlie situated 80km to the
north. Well-established power, access roads and supporting infrastructure exist in the area. 

Asset fundamentals  
St Ives controls exploration and mineral rights over a total area of 112,810 hectares (total of
LICENCE STATUS
granted tenements) and has security of tenure for all current exploration and mining leases that
AND HOLDINGS
contribute to future Mineral Reserves.

OPERATIONAL St Ives currently operates three underground mines, which are accessed via declines, several
INFRASTRUCTURE AND open pits, a centralised administrative office, an engineering workshop and a 4.7Mtpa.
MINERAL PROCESSING CIP processing plant.

St Ives is situated in an area of arid bush land. While occasional storm activity may cause minor
CLIMATE delays to open-pit mining operations, the climatic conditions do not materially impact on the
normal operations of the site.

Archaean orogenic greenstone gold hosted in a number of different styles of mineralisation.


DEPOSIT TYPE
Lode, supergene and palaeoplacer style deposits characterise the range of ore body types

Ongoing extensional and brownfields exploration continues and could increase the LoM. It is
LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM)
estimated that the current known Mineral Reserves will be depleted in 2020 (six years).

The mine maintained OHSAS 18001 Occupational Health and Safety Management System
ENVIRONMENTAL/HEALTH
certification and ISO 14001 Environmental Management System certification. St Ives was
AND SAFETY
certified as fully compliant with the International Cyanide Management Code on 3 June 2009.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 73

Brief history Key developments


Gold was discovered at Kambalda Red Hill camp in 1897 and • Commencement of Invincible open-pit infrastructure and
during the following 10 years, other gold-bearing locations, such bunding in 2014 to facilitate open-pit mining on Lefroy Lake
as Victory, were discovered with an estimated total production of in early 2015
31koz, mostly from the Red Hill group of mines. • Exploration of early stage targets along the highly prospective
Invincible (Speedway) trend are providing encouraging results
Iron-nickel sulphides were discovered near the old Red Hill • Maiden 168koz underground Mineral Reserve at Invincible
mine. Western Mining Corporation (WMC) acquired ground and • Neptune open-pit stage 1 mining completed in 2014,
developed a mining and milling operation. From 1966 to 1996 evaluation of future stages underway
the region produced approximately 34.0Mt of ore at an average • Athena is near completion and mining of final stopes is
grade of 3.1% nickel. scheduled in the latter part of 2015
• Limited success with exploration at Cave Rocks in 2014,
In 1981, the Victory-Defiance complex (Leviathan area) was
mine closure mooted in 2015 with completion of drill
discovered. Gold production commenced at St Ives using a
programme and final exploration close-out review
0.5Mtpa treatment plant (later expanded to 1.2Mtpa) located at
• Ongoing evaluation and elimination of marginal Mineral
the Kambalda Nickel Concentrator site. In 1988 a new 3.1Mtpa
Resources and Mineral Reserves contributed to improved
CIL facility was constructed 25 kilometres south of Kambalda
quality but lower volumes primarily at Greater Santa Ana
at St Ives.
and Cave Rocks
In 2001 a 2.0Mt heap leach facility was commissioned and Gold
Fields Limited acquired St Ives. In 2004 the 4.8Mtpa Lefroy mill
was constructed and fully commissioned in early 2005.

2006 saw the start of an aggressive exploration programme


with full field air core drilling and in 2007 the start-up and
establishment of Cave Rocks and Belleisle underground mines.
Initiation of new consolidated Leviathan open-pit commenced in
2008.

The Athena-Hamlet deposit was discovered in 2009. This was


followed by continued discovery and growth of the Hamlet
deposit and commencement of the Athena mine with the first ore
intersected in May 2010. Athena reached commercial levels of
production in September 2011. Hamlet development intersected
first ore in October 2011 as part of a new mine development
programme.

During 2012 stoping commenced at Hamlet. Cave Rocks


LoM was extended, as well as an early-stage discovery of a
new camp (Invincible deposit). In addition, conversion to open-
pit owner mining was completed and heap leach processing
stopped.

The ongoing successful exploration strategy delivered the


Invincible deposit in 2013, with current Mineral Resources in
excess of 1.3Moz and an open-pit and underground Mineral
Reserve of 628koz and 168koz respectively. Depth and lateral
extensions at Invincible were identified and will be actively
explored as part of the 2015 exploration programme.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
74 Regions, operations and projects

370000E
350000E

390000E
N

Kambalda West

6550000N 6550000N

Core Farm
Kambalda Kambalda Lake Lefroy
Cave West East
Rocks Gatehouse
U/G Silver Lake Facility
South West Dome Temeraire

Eas
Pistol Club

ter
Formidable

nC
Bahama

au s
Intrepide
Santa Ana Swiftsure

ew
ay
Invincible Mars GREATER REVENGE
Agamemnon
OPEN-PIT COMPLEX
Revenge
Bellerophon
Neptune
Thunderer
Redback A5
Britannia GREATER VICTORY
Lefroy Mill
OPEN-PIT COMPLEX
Leviathan Paddys
Sp

West Idough
ee

East Idough
dw

6530000N 6530000N
ay
Co
rr
ido
r

Argo U/G Athena-


Argo
Hamlet U/G
Diana

Lake Lefroy
Junction

Widgiemooltha

6510000N 6510000N

HHH
Paris

6490000N 6490000N
370000E

PLAN SHOWING ST IVES MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014


0 2 4 6 8 10

Kilometres
Co-ordinate System : Map Grid of Australia Zone 51
(Geodetic Datum of Australia 1994)

Reference
U/G Mines Waste Dump
Towns Open-pits Inactive
Buildings Stockpiles
Roads Tailings/Leach Pad
Lease outline Open-pits Active
Gold rights only Open-pits Proposed

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 75

St Ives Gold Mine (continued)

Operating Statistics – St Ives


     Historic performance
           

  Units C2014 C2013 C2012 C2011

Open-pit mining          
Total mined kt 16,758 13,834 16,518 18,728
– Waste mined kt 15,130 11,175 12,356 14,421
– Ore mined kt 1,628 2,659 4,162 4,307
Mined grade g/t 2.16 1.3 1.5 1.7
Strip ratio (waste/ore) waste 9.29 4.2 3.5 4
Underground mining          
Total mined kt 2,759 3,231 2,528 2,524
– Waste mined kt 683 851 903 756
– Ore mined kt 2,077 2,380 1,626 1,768
Mined grade g/t 4.0 4.2 5.1 4.7
Processing          
Tonnes treated kt 4,553 4,763 7,038 6,745
Head grade g/t 2.61 2.8 2.2 2.4
Yield g/t 2.42 2.6 2 2.1
Plant recovery factor % 93.8 96 89 90
koz 362 403 443 466
Total gold production
kg 11,248 12,535 13,779 14,494
Tonnes milled kt 4,553 4,763 4,001 4,793
koz 358 391 416 434
– Yield ex-mill
g/t 2.4 2.6 2.8 2.8
Tonnes to heap leach kt  – n/a 2,287 1,952
koz 8 12 27 32
– Yield ex-heap leach
g/t n/a n/a 0.4 0.5
Financials          
Operating cost A$/oz 895 887 884 867
Capital expenditure A$/oz 360 339 669 381
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC) A$/oz 1,289 1,262 1,593 1,286
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 17.8 20.7 25.8 37.9
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 3.14 3.00 2.64 2.30
Mineral Reserves Moz 1.80 2.02 2.19 2.81
Rounding off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies, where this occurs it is not deemed significant.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
76 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Local geology In 2014 exploration focussed on project generation, advancing


prospective targets, retiring projects that failed to meet milestone
St Ives lies within the Kambalda domain, a subset of the
hurdle criteria and developing a good understanding of the
Norseman-Wiluna Belt. The Kambalda domain is bound by the
Speedway corridor. The Speedway trend is a 20km plus
north-north west trending Boulder-Lefroy fault (BLF) and Zuleika
prospective belt where milestone success was achieved at the
shear. The region has undergone four compressional events
Heracles, Far south and Incredible prospects and a number
predated by early extension and has been metamorphosed to
of high potential targets are still to be tested in 2015. The
upper greenschist or lower amphibolite facies.
Kambalda West, South West Dome and Eastern Causeway areas
The main structural feature of the St Ives area is the gently are effectively poorly explored to date and are also targeted for
south-plunging Kambalda anticline, which extends 35 kilometres exploration drilling in 2015.
from the south end of the Kambalda dome to the Junction Mine.
The majority of known gold deposits are proximal to the trace of
Mining
the anticlinal axis. A major second order structure known as the Conventional drill and blast with truck and shovel mining
Playa shear splays off the BLF shear zone and can be traced techniques are employed at all open pits. Grade control is
through the St Ives field for a distance in excess of 10km. generally expedited by inclined Reverse Circulation (RC) drilling
on grids determined by the ore body characteristics. Certain
There are several styles of gold mineralisation at St Ives. The
open-pit projects that include 10m to 40m of unconsolidated
individual deposits may contain more than one of these styles:
sedimentary overburden do not initially require drilling and
• lode mineralisation: Archaean lode mineralisation typically blasting. In such projects, hard rock is imported for sheeting
consisting of 0.5 to 20 metre-wide mesothermal vein to facilitate the access of equipment during mining, and/or
complexes that may also have hydraulic breccia’s and/or dewatering of the sedimentary overburden prior to mining.
mylonites, indicating movement on a shear
Load-and-haul is carried out by 140 tonne dump trucks and
• supergene mineralisation: broad zones of flat-lying gold
150 to 250 tonne excavators in backhoe and/or face shovel
mineralisation in weathered Archaean and overlying Tertiary
configuration. Mining benches vary from five to 10m, and are
sediments
excavated in five passes (flitches) of  about 2.5m per flitch.
• palaeoplacer mineralisation: placer deposits hosted by
Gold mineralisation is mined selectively to cut-off grades, and
palaeochannels in the unconsolidated Tertiary sediments
segregated into grade ranges to balance the ore production
which overlie the Archaean basement
and processing capacities on-site and maximise cash flow from
Exploration and resource definition drilling operations.

St Ives continuously explores the 112,810 hectares of tenement Underground mines at St Ives are commonly extensions of
holding to discover new Mineral Resources. Exploration is split open-pit mines. Underground operations are characterised by
between two teams, the first of which is tasked with discovering common features, which allow a high level of standardisation
new deposits while the second focuses on developing known in operating strategy, mine design, stoping methods, mining
deposits. These teams are supported by in-house geophysics, equipment and utilisation. Mines are accessed via declines, with
regional and corporate technical teams, along with an additional raises for return airways and ladder-ways used as a
established Mineral Resources team responsible for QA/QC, second means of egress. Drives are developed to access the
data management and Mineral Resource modelling. ore and future stoping production areas.

St Ives maintains rigorous QA/QC protocols on all its exploration Underground mining at St Ives is predominantly mechanised and
programmes. It draws on industry leading practice for data conducted by long-hole open stoping (LHOS), with subordinate
acquisition and utilises accredited laboratories which are cut-and-fill and room-and-pillar stoping for the shallower dipping
regularly reviewed both internally and externally. Analytical QA/ ore bodies. Paste fill and LHOS is used where mandated by
QC is maintained and monitored through the submission of geotechnical factors. Electric-hydraulic drilling jumbos and
blanks, certified reference material and duplicates plus umpire rubber-tyred diesel-powered LHDs are used for development
laboratory checks. This ensures sign-off by Competent Persons and stoping, while trucks are used for load-and-haul operations.
under the SAMREC 2007 and JORC 2012 Codes. Ore from both open-pit and underground operations is
transported with road trains from individual mining operations to
the central St Ives processing facilities.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 77

St Ives Gold Mine (continued)

Mine planning and scheduling Projects


The Mineral Reserve definition processes are similar for open-pit
The current major mine expansion project at St Ives is at the
and underground operations. Cut-off grades are used to define
new Invincible open-pit mine, which is in the production build-
potentially economic mining panels, taking into consideration
up phase with ore production planned to commence in 2015.
direct mining and processing costs, group set commodity prices
Site infrastructure establishment commenced in late 2014.
and other parameters. The economic viability of future mining
panels is tested by determining whether the optimal margin, The discovery and opportunity provided by the new Invincible
after applying the appropriate cut-off grade, is sufficient to open-pit and associated exploration upside is a major
cover the required capital development and mining costs. contributor to the future of St Ives. Amendments to existing
lake based mining permits, technical and feasibility studies
Open-pit optimisation software, in conjunction with economic
have all been completed to enable the mine to commence
parameters and physical constraints is used to generate a
production in early 2015. The Invincible underground potential
series of nested pits for open-pit mining. An optimal shell is then
will be assessed further in 2015 as new drilling below the
selected and a detailed design used to confirm the mineability. 
designed open pit to test for mineralised shoot extensions and
geotechnical information becomes available. 
Underground mining methods are largely determined by the
geometry of the mineralised zones and evaluation may involve
Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves
review of more than one method. Sophisticated proprietary
software is used for mine design and scheduling. Geology and evaluation models have been updated to reflect
the latest available data sets. An integrated mine design and
Mine planning is based on three-dimensional block models of schedule plan is based on current performance levels and
in situ mineralisation, with allowances made for minimum mining takes cognisance of the inherent risks associated with mining
widths, dilution and ore loss in line with the mining method being operations at St Ives.
considered.
The Mineral Resources are classified as Measured, Indicated
Infrastructure, waste disposal and ore stockpile management and Inferred as defined in the SAMREC Code. Increasing
requirements are incorporated into the planning process. levels of geoscientific knowledge and confidence are based
Ore stockpile management at St Ives strives to optimise the on geological understanding, grade variance, drill hole/
metallurgical blend requirements of  the Lefroy Mill, with regard sample spacing, mining development (amount of exposed
to material types and grade management. This in turn helps to and mapped mineralisation) and mining history. The economic
maximise cash flow from the operations. evaluation is based on the Group planning gold price, taking into
account estimates of all costs, the impact of modifying factors
such as mining dilution and metal/ore recovery, processing
recovery and royalties. All Mineral Resources and Mineral
Reserves reported are 100% attributable to St Ives Gold Mine.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
78 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Mineral Resources
The Mineral Resource statement for St Ives is summarised in the year changes are discussed in the reconciliation section.
tables below. The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves have The surface sources include stockpiles that are supported by
been updated using the current Gold Fields planning gold price adequate sampling, and are thus classified as Measured Mineral
of US$1,500/oz and US$1,300/oz respectively and reported Resources.
in accordance with SAMREC Code. The impacts of year-on-

Mineral Resource classification


  Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
       

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit and
underground                  
Measured 1,475 1,750 2,131 5.53 4.93 4.36 262 277 299
Indicated 17,496 20,511 29,905 3.98 3.87 3.09 2,238 2,551 2,967
Inferred 6,617 10,899 12,585 4.05 3.86 3.27 861 1,351 1,324
Total open-pit and 25,587 33,150 44,622 4.09 3.92 3.20 3,361 4,179 4,591
underground
Surface                  
Measured stockpiles 4,498 5,294 4,129 1.02 0.94 0.98 147 160 129
Total surface 4,498 5,294 4,129 1.02 0.94 0.98 147 160 129
Grand total 30,085 38,444 48,751 3.63 3.51 3.01 3,508 4,340 4,720

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 79

St Ives Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resource classification per source area


Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource
       
Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Area (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz) (000 t) (g/t) (000 oz)

Open-pit                        
Apollo 7 2.46 1 271 3.36 29 161 2.63 14 440 3.08 44
Bondi – –  – – – – 169 3.50  19 169 3.50  19
Clifton – – –  360 2.85  33 108 2.74 9 467 2.83  42
Delta Island – – –  151 2.43  12  49 5.44 9 201  3.17  21
Hamlet – – –  487  3.07  48 – – – 487  3.07  48
Idough – East – – –  117  1.71 6 0  1.11 0 118  1.70 6
Idough – West 34 1.63 2  120  2.14 8  12  2.29 1 166  2.05  11
Intrepide – – – – – – 247  2.69  21 247  2.69  21
Invincible Pit – – –  5,909  4.80 913 1,052  3.38 114 6,960  4.59 1,027
Invincible South – – – – – – 397  6.64  85 397  6.64  85
Junction – – –  125  3.07  12  66  4.03 8 191  3.40  21
Neptune – – –  4,477  2.94 423 858  3.08  85 5,334  2.96 508
Neptune South – – –  306  2.25  22  75  2.46  6 381  2.29  28
Pistol Club – – –  166  5.20  28  20  2.89  2 186  4.95  30
Redback  21  4.37  3  2  3.92  0  26  3.04  3  48  3.65  6
Santa Ana – – –  871  2.60  73  40  2.53  3 911  2.60  76
Swiftsure – – –  122  5.80  23  3  7.40  1 125  5.84  23
Temeraire – – –  206  1.54  10 – – – 206  1.54  10
Thunderer  27  2.95  3  142  3.37  15  11  1.72  1 180  3.20  19
Trinidad – – –  287  3.01  28  9  1.95  1 296  2.98  28
Yorick – – –  75  4.97  12 260  3.95  33 336  4.18  45
Total open-pit  89  2.73  8 14,195  3.72 1,696 3,562  3.62 414 17,846  3.69 2,118
Underground                        
Argo  150  4.57  22  657  4.24  89 409  3.43  45 1,216  4.01 157
Athena  452  6.26  91  220  4.83  34  75  4.49  11 747  5.66 136
Cave Rocks  390  4.53  57  96  4.37  13 278  4.47  40 764  4.49 110
East Repulse  3  7.06  1  37  6.04  7  88  6.46  18 128  6.36  26
Hamlet  390  6.67  84  1,514  5.82 283 880  5.04 142 2,784  5.69 509
Invincible UG – – –  778  4.60 115 1,120  4.30 155 1,898  4.42 270
Invincible South – – – – – – 203  5.37  35 203  5.37  35
Total underground 1,386  5.71  254  3,301  5.11 542 3,054  4.55 447 7,741  5.00 1,243

Surface                        
Surface stockpiles 4,498  1.02  147 – – – – – – 4,498  1.02 147
Grand total 5,973  2.13  409 17,496  3.98 2,238 6,617  4.05 861 30,085  3.63 3,508

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
80 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Modifying factors
• All Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades • Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo regular
and tonnages, as delivered to the metallurgical processing internal and/or external audits, and any issues identified are
facilities, and are therefore fully diluted rectified at the earliest opportunity – usually during current
• The Mineral Reserve statements include only Measured and reporting cycle
Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral • The Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources are inclusive
Reserves and are contained in the LoM plan of Mineral Reserves 

         

December December December


  Units  2014 2013 2012
         

Mineral Resource parameters        


         

US$/oz 1,500 1,500 1,650


Mineral Resource gold price
A$/oz 1,570 1,570 1,650
Cut-off for oxide ore g/t 0.99 – 1.02 0.95 – 1.00 0.59 – 0.64
Cut-off for fresh ore g/t 0.99 – 2.8 0.95 – 2.9 0.59 – 2.9
Cut-off for mill feed g/t 1.00 0.95 0.96
Cut-off for open-pit g/t 1.00 0.95 0.59 – 0.64
Cut-off for underground g/t 2.4 – 2.8 2.3 – 2.9 2.10 – 2.90
Mineral Reserve parameters        
US$/oz 1,300 1,300 1,500
Mineral Reserve gold price
A$/oz 1,370 1,370 1,500
Cut-off for oxide ore g/t 0.95  0.90 0.54 – 0.57
Cut-off for fresh ore g/t 0.95 – 3.1 0.90 – 2.9 0.54 – 3.0
Cut-off for mill feed underground g/t 2.7 – 3.1 2.6 – 3.0 2.3 – 3.0
Cut-off for mill feed open-pit g/t 0.95 0.90 0.80
Mining recovery factor (underground) % 85 – 95 85 – 95 75 – 95
Mining recovery factor (open-pit) % 80 – 95 80 – 95 95 – 99
Strip ratio (waste:ore) ratio 9.3 4.2 6.8
MCF % 98 98 98
Dilution open-pit % 20 20 6 – 20
Dilution underground % 5 – 40 5 – 40 5 – 40
Plant recovery factor % 86 – 94 86 – 94 83 – 94
Processing capacity Mtpa 4.7 4.8 4.8

Grade tonnage curve


Grade tonnage curves for the underground and open-pit Mineral Resource.

Grade tonnage curve − Underground


12 12.0

10 10.0

8.0
Tonnes (millions)

8
Grade (g/t)

6 6.0

4 4.0

2 2.0 Tonnes above cut-off


Average grade above cut-off
0 0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Cut-off grade (g/t)

Grade tonnage curve − Surface


25 10.0

20 8.0
Tonnes (millions)

Grade (g/t)

15 6.0

10 4.0

5 2.0 Tonnes above cut-off


Average grade above cut-off
0 0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

Cut-off grade (g/t)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 81

St Ives Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves • Surface sources include stockpiles. St Ives assumes that


Reported Mineral Reserves at St Ives reduced nominally to stockpiles are supported by adequate sampling, and are thus
1.8Moz since December 2013. The dominant contributors to classified as Proved Mineral Reserves
Mineral Reserves are the Athena, Hamlet, Invincible, Neptune and
The Mineral Reserves are derived following the generation of the
the Cave Rocks mines. The Mineral Reserve statement for St Ives
LoM plan, supported by a detailed design and schedule, and
is summarised in the tables below. The following points apply:
incorporating appropriate modifying factors.
• Estimates for St Ives include allowances for all relevant
modifying factors
• Mineral Reserves are reported in terms of tonnages, grades
and contained gold delivered for processing

Mineral Reserve classification


  Tonnes (000t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
       

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit and underground                  


Proved 1,081 1,202 1,085  4.76  4.70  4.72  166 181 165
Probable 12,264 14,203 20,590  3.78  3.68  2.86 1,490 1,681 1,896
Total open-pit and underground 13,346 15,405 21,674  3.86  3.76  2.96  1,655 1,863 2,061
Surface                  
Proved 4,498 5,294 4,129  1.02  0.94  0.98  147 160 129
Total surface 4,498 5,294 4,129  1.02  0.94  0.98  147 160 129
Grand total 17,844 20,699 25,804  3.14  3.03  2.64  1,803 2,022 2,190

Mineral Reserve classification per mining area


Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
     

Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Mining area (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz)

Open-pit                  
Clifton – – –  130  2.98  12  130  2.98  12
Delta Island – – –  138  2.30  10  138  2.30  10
Invincible Pit – – –  5,075  3.85  628  5,075  3.85  628
Neptune – – –  2,713  3.06  267  2,713  3.06  267
Neptune South – – –  272  2.02  18  272  2.02  18
Pistol Club – – –  108  5.26  18  108  5.26  18
Redback  18  4.29  2.4  1  3.46  0.2  19  4.22  3
Santa Ana – – –  756  2.34  57  756  2.34  57
Swiftsure – – –  140  4.77  21  140  4.77  21
Thunderer  5  2.45  0.4  127  2.96  12  132  2.94  12
Total open-pit  22  3.89  3  9,461  3.43  1,045  9,483  3.44  1,047
Underground                  
Athena  415  4.98  66  107  4.22  15  523  4.82  81
Cave Rocks  360  3.87  45  124  3.59  14  484  3.80  59
Hamlet  284  5.64  51  1,584  4.88  248  1,868  4.99  300
Invincible UG – – –  988  5.29  168  988  5.29  168
Total underground  1,059  4.78  163  2,803  4.94  445  3,863  4.90  608
Surface                  
Surface stockpiles  4,498  1.02  147 – – –  4,498  1.02  147
Grand total  5,579  1.74  313  12,264  3.78  1,490  17,844  3.14  1,803

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
82 Regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Factors that affected Factors that affected


Mineral Resource Mineral Reserve
reconciliation year-on-year reconciliation year-on-year
• Mined depletion since December 2013 • Mined depletion since December 2013
• Discovery was dominated by Invincible and small • Discovery was dominated by Invincible, and nominal
extensions at Athena extensions at Athena; Invincible underground defined a
• At Cave Rocks the 2014 exploration drilling identified maiden Reserve in 2014
additions down dip and across strike but at a lower grade
• Change in detailed geological widths on depth
• Economic factors (higher power cost) impacting Argo,
extensions at Hamlet has reduced tonnes
Conqueror and Cave Rocks
• Additional Santa Ana Mineral Resources were removed • At Athena, mining and the final stope removal at depth
from the Mineral Resource to mineral inventory based on are scheduled for late-2015/early-2016 with subsequent
prevailing economic factors mine closure 

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
5,000 2,500
4,340
4,500 2,022
271 345 1,803
4,000 3,508 2,000
3,500 (381)
(367) (268) (86) (105) (39)
3,000 1,500 (381) (40)
2,500
2,000 1,000
1,500
1,000 500
500
0 0
Mined
depletions

Economic
factors

Discovery

Resource
modelling

Inclusions/
Exclusions

Mined
depletions

Gold price

Costs

Discovery

Resource
modelling

Inclusions/
Exclusions
Dec 2014

Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Dec 2013

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 83

St Ives Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserve sensitivity


To illustrate the impact of fluctuations in gold price and Competent Persons
exchange rates on the current declaration, St Ives has generated Internal technical reviews have been conducted on the
sensitivities with respect to Mineral Reserves. The following St Ives asset by the Competent Persons as listed, who
are full-time employees of Gold Fields Limited
graph indicates the Managed Mineral Reserve sensitivity at
-15%, -10%, -5%, base (A$1,370), +5%, +10%, +15% and M Jolly: Manager Mineral Resources
+25% to the gold price. MSc (Geology), EDP Wits Business School, MAusIMM,
(304960).
These sensitivities (other than for the base case) are not
supported by detailed plans and depletion schedules. They Malcolm is the lead Competent Person in
should only be considered on an indicative basis; specifically as terms of  SAMREC and has 34 years’ experience in the
mining industry (six years at St Ives) and is responsible
such sensitivities assume 100% selectivity, without any operating
for the overall accuracy, standard and compliance of
cost increases. this declaration.

Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold − Moz) J Woodcock: Exploration Manager


2.5 MSc in Geology, MAusIMM (305446).
2.0 Julian has 13 years’ experience in the mining industry
1.5 (four years at St Ives) and is responsible for all surface
1.0
exploration and Mineral Resource development drilling,
and the oversight of exploration Mineral Resource
0.5
development geology models.
0.0
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25% L Smuts: Resources Manager
Base gold price (A$1,370/oz) BSc (Hons), Pr Sci Nat (400083/03), PG California (8215)

Lourens has 17 years’ mining industry experience


(three years at St Ives), and is responsible for the oversight
and development of technical standards/auditing and
validation for the site-wide Mineral Resource estimation
processes and models.

L Grimbeek: Mine Geology Manager


BSc (Hons), Pr Sci Nat (400086/92).

Leon has 27 years’ experience in the mining industry


(three years at St Ives) and is responsible for the mine
geology processes, exploration and short- to medium-
term Mineral Resource development function.

D Worthy Technical Manager
B Eng Hons (Mining), MAusIMM, (208354).

Dan has 13 years’ experience in the mining industry


(five years at St Ives) and is responsible for the overall
accuracy, standard and compliance of Mine Planning,
schedules and Reserve estimation, LoM compilation
and financial evaluation.

S Ellery: Resource Evaluation Superintendent


BSc (Hons), MSc Geology, Grad Dip Applied Finance
and Investment (SIA), MAusIMM (110420).

Simon has 23 years’ experience in the mining industry


(23 years at St Ives) and is responsible for some aspects
of economic evaluation. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
84 regions, operations and projects

2.2 Australia region (continued)

Far Southeast – 40% attributable to GFI

Gold and copper deposit in the Philippines 


Mineral Resources of 19.8Moz gold and 9,921Mlb copper
Location

The Far Southeast (FSE) project is situated in the established mining district of Mankayan in the Cordillera Region of Northern Luzon,
approximately 250km north of Manila.

Project ownership and capital expenditure Deposit Geology


The FSE copper-gold porphyry is a deeply concealed deposit
Exploration is being conducted by Far Southeast Gold
associated with a Pleistocene diorite – dacite intrusion complex
Resources Inc. (FSGRI), a joint venture company of the Lepanto
intruded into Eocene basaltic country rocks. The intrusion
Consolidated Mining Company (LCMC) and Gold Fields
complex is cross-cut by several large phreatomagmatic breccia
Ltd (GFL). To date GFL has acquired 40% of the project for
pipes, which are pre-, syn- and post-mineralisation. Most of
payments of US$230 million and has the option to acquire a
the mineralisation is hosted in the intrusion complex and to a
further 20% for an additional payment of US$110 million.
lesser extent the basaltic country rocks and is characterised
Regional geology by disseminated sulphides and multi-phase sulphide-bearing
quartz and quartz-anhydrite vein sets and stock works.
The Mankayan district is underlain by a basement of pre-Middle
Miocene volcanic and intrusive rocks, which is unconformably Exploration process, sampling and QAQC
overlain by an extensive cover sequence of Late Pliocene-
No drilling took place at the FSE project during 2014. Much of
Pleistocene dacitic tuffs and breccias, the eruption of which
2014 was occupied with a study of the higher grade zones of
was accompanied by the intrusion of diorite and dacite
the deposit, involving detailed re-logging of  all core intersections
stocks and domes. Major north-trending strike-slip faults
within those zones. This resulted in a more refined geological
of the Philippine Fault system dominate the structure of the
model for the higher-grade zone and a clearer understanding of
district and have exerted fundamental controls on igneous
the controls on the mineralisation for the deposit as a whole.
activity and mineralisation. The district-scale mineralisation is
characterised by intermediate sulphidation veins and fault- The geological model and data stemming from the study have
controlled high-sulphidation enargite – luzonite deposits that been used to support a resource assessment of the higher-
have been mined for precious and base metals principally at the grade zone of the deposit, which in turn, will feed into a scoping
Victoria and Lepanto mines. A number of copper-gold porphyry study on selective mining of the higher grades. This study is due
prospects also exist, which principally include the FSE porphyry for completion in the Q2 2015.
deposit itself.
Sampling and assay of drill core at the FSE project is controlled
by strict QA/QC procedures in accordance with the SAMREC
Code, with regular internal and external audits. Prior to the
release of the 2012 Mineral Resource estimate all aspects of
sampling and assay were independently audited and the Mineral
Resource model was also externally audited. Routine external
audits of the project’s database have also been performed.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 85

Social licence to operate


Negotiations with the local Council of Elders continued
throughout the year with the objective of obtaining a
Memorandum of Agreement to secure a Certificate of
Precondition from the National Commission on Indigenous
Peoples. The latter is a prerequisite to the company’s application
for a Financial or Technical Assistance Agreement (FTAA).
Gold Fields can only exercise its option agreement with LCMC
to acquire majority shareholding (additional 20%) of the FSE
project after obtaining a FTAA from the government, which is a
prolonged process.

Environmental baseline monitoring continued throughout the


year as part of FSGRI’s Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment. 

Mineral Resources
An Inferred Mineral Resource for the FSE deposit was declared
in September 2012, within a mining constraint, which assumed
an eventual non-selective, bulk underground mining method.
The classification of Inferred Resource was applied based on
drill hole spacing, estimation quality, geological continuity and
geological understanding of the deposit in early 2012 and is
compliant with the SAMREC Code.

Tonnes Grade Content


       

Far Southeast    Au Cu Au Cu
Gold and Copper (Mt) (g/t) (%) (Moz) (Mlb)

Inferred – Gold and copper 891.7 0.69 0.50 19.800 9,921


Table – FSE Mineral Resources effective 31 August 2012 (unchanged)
Notes:
1 These Mineral Resources are not Mineral Reserves as an assessment to a minimum of a prefeasibility study is required.
2 The Mineral Resource is reported in accordance with the SAMREC Code.
3 The Mineral Resource is reported within an optimised underground bulk mining shell that is derived using a scoping study plus mining, processing and cost parameters, and
commodity prices of US$1,650/oz Au and US$8,600/t Cu. All Inferred Mineral Resource material within the shell is reported.
4 The Mineral Resource is reported without dilution and ore loss parameters.
5 Rounding-off of figures may result in minor computational discrepancies, where this happens, it is not deemed significant.
6 Lepanto Consolidated Mining Company holds a 60% interest, while Gold Fields holds a 40% interest in the Far Southeast Project. Attributable metal is 7.9Moz Au and
3,968Mlb (1.8Mt) Cu to Gold Fields.

Outlook
The main focus of the project will be to complete the negotiations and procedures required for obtaining the FTAA. Technical and
operating/capital cost studies will in the meantime focus on the high-grade selective mining scoping study and optimisation of costs.

Competent Person
Internal technical reviews have been conducted on the FSE project asset by the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-
time employees of Gold Fields Limited.

A Trueman: Lead Competent Person and Chief Resource Geologist


BSc (Hons) Geology; PGeo, APEGBC 149753; MAusIMM CP (Geo) 110730.

Mr Trueman has geology and resource estimation experience spanning 23 years including more than five years of relevant
experience in the estimation of porphyry systems similar to FSE. Mr Trueman has been part of the project since Gold Fields’
first involvement in 2009.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
2.3 South Africa region

World-class mechanised mine in


the Witwatersrand Basin. As project
construction shifts to production
build-up, South Deep is a kingpin
asset to support the Gold Fields
vision:
South Africa
To be the global leader in
sustainable gold mining

The South Africa region Mineral Resources

currently accounts for 73%


of the gold Mineral Resource
76.0 million ounces
and 73% of the gold Mineral Mineral Reserves

Reserve base, excluding


growth projects. 38.0 million ounces 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 87

South Deep 
The mechanised mine is still in the production ramp-up phase.
The current Life-of-Mine (LoM) is estimated to extend to 2087
(73 years). 

The review by the Geotechnical Review Board (GRB), of South LIMPOPO


Deep’s current mining layout and methodology, as well as the
geotechnical support regime, commenced in 2014.

Concurrent with the GRB review, Gold Fields is undertaking a


wholesale strategic review of the operation with the objective of
re‑basing the production profile and positioning South Deep as NORTH
a core franchise asset. WEST GAUTENG
Johannesburg
2015 will focus on a new mining strategy, which will be aligned to
the new pillar configuration, once completed and approved. This
will be anchored by the latest updated resource model, so that
new mine designs and schedules will inform the December 2015
MPUMALANGA
Mineral Reserves.
SOUTH
The ore body is AFRICA
well understood FREE STATE

and all key


infrastructure LESOTHO
is now installed
to deliver the
mine as a low
cost, long-life
mechanised
mining operation.

Operational profile
 

Mining method Long-hole stoping, low-profile mining (destress) and drift and benching
Two shaft systems are in production – the twin shaft complex, with the main and ventilation shafts to
Infrastructure and Mineral
110 level, as well as the south shaft complex, which has a main and two sub-vertical shafts to 95 level
Processing
and one CIP gold plant with a capacity of 4.0Mtpa
Mineralisation style Palaeoplacer 
i. Mineralisation hosted by conglomerates (reefs);
ii. Laterally continuous with long-range predictability;
Mineralisation characteristics iii. Clear patterns of predictable mineralisation governed by sedimentary characteristics; and
iv Exploration programmes and grade control drilling ongoing to test homogeneity of  geology and
grade domains 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
88 Regions, operations and projects

2.3 South Africa region (continued)

Positioning Regional Geology

South South Deep is located in the Far West Rand


Goldfield on the north-western rim of the
hydrothermalism. The most fundamental control
to the gold distribution remains the association
Deep to Witwatersrand Basin. This basin comprises a with quartz-pebble conglomerates on intra-
6,000 metre-thick sequence of predominantly basinal unconformities. The Modified Palaeoplacer
deliver on clastic sedimentary rocks, the upper part of which, Model is the favoured mineralisation model that is
one of the the Central Rand Group, is characterised by the currently in use. 
occurrence of auriferous and uraniferous quartz-
largest pebble conglomerates (reefs) that are sporadically Exploration drilling and expenditure

known gold interspersed between finer grained quartzitic


units. All major reef units are developed above
On-lease metres drilled and expenditure for the
12-month period ended 31 December 2014 are
ore bodies unconformity surfaces. The angle of unconformity summarised below. No brownfields surface drilling
is typically greatest near the basin margin and exploration was conducted in 2014.
in the world decreases toward more distal areas.
Underground long-inclined borehole (LIB) drilling
The reefs are considered to represent extensive continues from 100 2W into Corridor 1 to increase
fluvial deposits into a yoked basin, some geological confidence and the targeted 30m x
350 kilometres long in an east-north-easterly 30m underground drilling protocol to provide
direction, and 200 kilometres wide in a north- increased resource definition and grade control
north-westerly direction. The reefs are continuous is adhered to where drilling platforms permit.
as a consequence of the regional nature of the
In accordance with the SAMREC 2007 Code,
erosional surfaces. Preferential reef development
rigorous QA/QC protocols are maintained on
within channel systems and sedimentary features
all exploration programmes. Leading industry
such as facies variations and channel frequency
practice for data acquisition is applied and
assist in mapping out local gold distributions.
accredited laboratories, which are regularly
The gold is deemed to be primarily of detrital reviewed both internally and externally, are utilised.
origin, deposited syngenetically with the Analytical QA/QC is maintained and monitored
conglomerates. Although the gold generally occurs through the submission of blanks, certified
in native form and is usually associated with pyrite reference material and duplicates plus umpire
and carbon, most of it has been subsequently laboratory checks.
modified and locally remobilised during secondary

December 2014 December 2013


   

Metres ZAR US$ Metres ZAR US$


Operation drilled  (millions)  (millions) drilled  (millions)  (millions)

South Deep 3,295 6.15 0.57 9,983 26.9 2.8

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 89

Reference
Gold Fields

old
eG
T. N.

Roads

any
Sib
Farm Boundaries
Westonaria

R500
Towns
Sibanye Gold N
12
Durban Sibanye Gold
R501
Roodepoort Deep CARLETONVILLE
Sibanye Gold
Harmony
AngloGold
Ashanti Blyvooruitzicht SOUTH DEEP
tona Sibanye Gold
Tau GOLD MINE

R2
g

8
en
on
Mp

Kusasalethu

R500
FOCHVILLE
N
12

0 5 10

Kilometres

Social licence to operate


South Deep’s commitment to continued improvement in health, to develop a solution for managing acid mine drainage (AMD)
safety and environmental management is underpinned by generation in the underground workings at mine closure.
its ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001 certification, and its Underground AMD generation is well managed during the
certification to the International Cyanide Management Code. operational phase by ongoing pumping to surface of the
underground water.
Energy and carbon management is a key business imperative to
reduce our carbon footprint and to realise cost savings through South Deep has an approved Water Use Licence (WUL) that
the implementation of energy efficiency initiatives. South Deep was issued in November 2011. A water use license amendment
will be developing a five-year energy security plan (which will application will be submitted to the Department of Water Affairs
include an assessment of renewable energy options) to manage and Sanitation (DWAS) in Q2 2015, mainly to reflect various
the supply risks currently faced by South Africa’s national water management initiatives and updates to the mines water
electricity utility, Eskom. In the short term, a load curtailment management approach, since the licence was issued.
arrangement has been negotiated with Eskom to minimise
South African legislation requires the submission of a Social and
production disruptions and ensure the continued safe operation
Labour Plan (SLP) as a prerequisite for the granting of mining or
of the mine.
production rights. The SLP requires mining companies to develop
Other environmental initiatives are focussed on responsible and implement comprehensive human resources development
water, air (including dust control) and mine closure management, programmes (including employment equity plans) and Local
and on maintaining our licence to operate through regulatory Economic Development (LED) programmes. These programmes
compliance. A comprehensive water management action plan are aimed at promoting employment and advancing the social
was developed in 2014 to ensure an integrated approach to and economic welfare of all South Africans with a strong focus on
water management. The plan includes cost saving measures community development. South Deep submitted a revised SLP to
such as the installation of reverse osmosis plants to treat mine the regulatory authority in Q2 2013, which remains under review.
water to potable standards, which reduces the mines Rand However, South Deep continues to implement the commitments
Water intake (saving an estimated R300 000 per month from in the SLP and provides an annual report to the regulator on its
July 2015). In 2015, additional technical studies are planned progress with meeting these commitments.

           

Total
Recordable CO2
Fatal Injury Injury Energy emissions Water
Frequency Frequency consumption (000 tonnes) withdrawal
Sustainability factors Rate Rate (TJ) (scope 1 & 2) (million litres)
           

           

C2014 0.16 4.65 1,807 497.9 2,225


South Deep
C2013 0.06 5.19 2,137 559.3 3,370

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
90 regions, operations and projects

2.3 South Africa region (continued)

South Deep Gold Mine  www.goldfields.com

GENERAL LOCATION

South Deep Gold Mine is situated in the magisterial districts of Westonaria and Vanderbijlpark (Gauteng province), some 45 kilometres
south-west of  Johannesburg at latitude 26º 25’ S and longitude 27º 40’ E. It is accessed via the N12 provincial road between
Johannesburg and Potchefstroom. 

Asset fundamentals
The conversion of the old order mining right to a new-order mining right, as required in terms
LICENCE STATUS AND of the Minerals and Petroleum Resources Development Act, No 28 of 2002 (the MPRD Act), was
HOLDINGS approved in July 2010. The aerial extent of the South Deep lease area is 4,268 hectares. All required
authorisation has been obtained and is in good standing. 

The workings are accessed from the surface through two shaft systems – the Twin Shaft Complex
(main and ventilation shafts to 110 level), of which the main shaft comprises a single-drop to a depth
 
of 2,995 metres, the vent shaft to 2,947 metres and the South Shaft Complex, which is a sub vertical
system to 95 level. 
The mine has been subdivided into three main areas. “Old Mine” comprises the area above 87 level,
and is serviced from the South Shaft Complex. “Current Mine”, which is serviced from the Twin and
South Shafts, extends from 87 level to 95 level. “New Mine” extends from 100 level down to 110 level.
The North of Wrench area extends from a depth of 2,700 metres to 2,900 metres and the South of
Wrench area extends to a final depth of 3,300 metres.
South Deep Gold Mine operates one gold plant with a design capacity of 330ktpm. The milling
OPERATIONAL circuit consists of a single stage semi-autogenous grinding mill (SAG) for primary milling followed
INFRASTRUCTURE AND by secondary milling, utilising two overflow ball mills. Classification is done using cyclone clusters
MINERAL PROCESSING and Knelson concentrators facilitate the recovery of free gold. Free gold is upgraded using a Gemini
table and the final concentrate is smelted into bullion.
The cyclone overflow is thickened before the slurry reports to the leach circuit. Cyanide is used
for gold dissolution and lime is added to ensure protective alkalinity. An eight-stage, carousel-type
Carbon in Pulp (CIP) circuit is used for gold adsorption. After elution gold is recovered from the
solution using electro-winning sludge reactors, then dried and gold bullion is produced by smelting
in an induction furnace.

The top of the starter wall will be reached by mid-2018 and the end of phase 1 by mid-2020. The
TAILINGS STORAGE
construction of phase 2 needs to commence in early 2018 and the main penstock needs to be in
FACILITY
place by 2029.

CLIMATE No extreme climate conditions are experienced that may affect mining operations.

Intermediate to deep-level gold mine (>2,000m below surface) exploiting auriferous palaeoplacers
(reefs), namely the conglomerates that comprise the Upper Elsburg Reefs of the Mondeor Formation.
DEPOSIT TYPE
Historically the Ventersdorp Contact Reef (VCR) of the Venterspost Formation has been exploited
using conventional mining methods.

LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM) It is estimated that the current Mineral Reserves will be depleted in 2087 (73 years).

South Deep obtained its ISO 14001:2004 certification in September 2008 and has maintained
this certification since that time. Reporting on environmental issues and sustainable development
ENVIRONMENTAL –
and community is done according to the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) requirements. The mine
HEALTH AND SAFETY
obtained full compliance with the International Cyanide Management Code (ICMC) in December
2008 and this certificate was renewed in December 2011.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 91

Brief history of South Deep  Setting South Deep up for long-term success
South Deep was hindered in May last year by a four-month
Commercial production of the Western Areas Gold Mine
suspension of production due to the introduction of an extensive
commenced in September 1951. In 1990, Western Areas Gold
ground support remediation programme. The remediation
Mining Company Limited shareholders approved the transfer,
programme took most of the legacy haulages and arterial routes
cession and assignment of certain land and mineral rights to
on 95 level and above, from where a significant proportion
South Deep Exploration Company Limited in exchange for its
of current production is sourced, out of service with a
shares. Western Areas Gold Mining Company Limited (WAL) and
commensurate impact on production.
South Deep Exploration Company Limited merged on 1 January
1995. Development of 95 level across to the planned collar
Two alternative mining methods are under review. The first
position of Twins commenced.
method is the 4.5m X 4.5m destress method and the second
is the Inclined Mining Slot method. Both of these methods, if
On 1 April 1999, the Placer Dome/Western Areas (PDWA) joint
successful, could assist in de-risking the South Deep build-
venture was formed and in February 2000, the name of the
up plan and future production profiles, and could also have a
mine was changed to South Deep Gold Mine. Sinking of the
meaningful positive impact on mining costs. The piloting of the
ventilation shaft was completed to 95 level in 2001 and the main
4.5m X 4.5m destress will be initiated in 2015. It is too early to
shaft to 110 level in 2002, concurrently a 7,200tpd capacity
assess whether either of these methods could be commercially
mill was commissioned. The Twin Shaft Complex was officially
implemented.
opened on 4 February 2005. Post a prefeasibility study in
2006, the ventilation shaft was deepened to 110 level and was
The way forward encompasses several key elements to set South
commissioned in 2012.
Deep up for long-term success including:

Barrick Gold Corporation acquired a majority interest in Placer


• fixing the basics and achieving breakeven
Dome Inc. on 20 January 2006 and Gold Fields acquired
• embedding the right leadership
Barrick’s 50% JV interest in the PDWA JV on 1 December 2006.
• installing operational flexibility and predictability
In April 2007 Gold Fields acquired all remaining WAL shares
• delivering the core enablers including support installation,
and consequently owned 100% of South Deep Gold Mine at
backfill, water management, HME planned maintenance, new
that time.
mine development and skills development.

A new-order mining right was granted to South Deep in 2010,


Given the material influence the broad spectrum of current
including the area known as Uncle Harry’s. During 2011,
studies and initiatives can potentially have on the South Deep
Newshelf 899 Proprietary Limited (Newshelf) was established,
plan, a holding pattern has been adopted with regard to
which holds a 100% interest in South Deep Gold Mine. Newshelf
the Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve declaration for
is a 90% subsidiary of Gold Fields Limited and the remaining
December 2014 in that the December 2013 model will be
10% is held by outside shareholders as part of the BBBEE
depleted by the 2014 mining production. The depleted 2013
transaction.
model, will by nature reflect last year’s assumptions on modifying
factors, production rates and cost modelling, but until new
Key developments
metrics and rates are validated this is deemed to be prudent.
South Deep is a mine that has now been built to extract one This approach ensures that this year’s Mineral Resource
of the largest known gold ore bodies in the world. The 38Moz and Mineral Reserve declaration does not invoke untested
Mineral Reserve is underpinned by well understood ore body and unconfirmed revisions to various technical inputs to the
model and all key required infrastructure is now installed to Life‑of-Mine plan, which could prove inaccurate or potentially
deliver the mine as a low cost, long life mechanised mining misleading.  
operation. Due to its deep level and fully mechanised nature,
South Deep has no real benchmark operation in the industry and
the current focus therefore remains on establishing the basics
at the mine to drive productivity and leverage unit costs. In
addition, a wholesale strategic review of the operation is being
undertaken with the objective of positioning and rebasing South
Deep as a core franchise asset, that aims in the first instance to
achieve self-funding (breakeven) as soon as possible and then
to deliver consistent free cash flow margins going forward.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
92 Regions, operations and projects

Y - 64 000

Y - 72 000
Y - 70 000
Y - 66 000
N

X + 2 918 000
EZULWINI X + 2 918 000

ELANDSFONTEIN 346 - IQ
Bh.MD 31

Bh.MD 10

Bh.MD 7 1 SUB-VERT.
Bh.MD 5
X + 2 920 000 Bh.MD 34 X + 2 920 000

Bh.MD 8
Bh.MD 43

KLOOF
GOLD
MINE
DOORNPOORT
SOUTH SHAFT
3 SUB-VERT.

343-IQ
X + 2 922 000
347 - IQ 85 LEVEL
Bh.MD 17 Bh.MD 18
X + 2 922 000

DRIEHOEK
87 LEVEL
Bh.MD 38 Bh.MD 40

90 LEVEL

MAIN SHAFT VENT SHAFT Bh.MD 22


Bh.DP 3 Bh.MD 15

TWIN SHAFTS 95 LEVEL


3 WEST JACHTFONTEIN 344-IQ
2 WEST O LINE
Bh.MD 46
Bh.DP 15 Bh.MD 44 1 WEST
X + 2 924 000 Bh.KMF 3 X + 2 924 000
Bh.MD 42
Bh.DP 11
Bh.MD 45 Wrench Fault

Bh.DP 14 Bh.DP 25
Bh.KMF 6

Bh.DP 8 Bh.DP 12 Bh.KMF 7


Bh.KMF 4
Bh.DP 22 MODDERFONTEIN 345 IQ
Bh.KMF 1

Bh.DP 16 Bh.KMF 5
Bh.DP 19 Bh.DP 7 Bh.KMF 8
LOI

Bh.KMF 2
VCR

Bh.DP 2
rop

Bh.DP 23
ault -

Sub - C

X + 2 926 000 X + 2 926 000


and F

Gemsbokfontein No1 Dyke


Bh.DP 20
R

Reefs
West

Bh.DP 17 Bh.K 1

HARTEBEESTFONTEIN 366-IQ
lsburg

Bh.DP 13
rE
Uppe

Bh.DP 18

Bh.KDP 1
Bh.DP 24 KALBASFONTEIN 365 - IQ
Bh.DP 21
Gemsbokfontein No 2 Dyke

DOORNPOORT 347 - IQ

PLAN SHOWING UNDERGROUND WORKINGS


AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014

AREA 4 268 HECTARES


Y - 72 000
Y - 66 000

Y - 70 000
Y - 68 000

0 1 2

Kilometres
o
Gauss Conform Projection. Central Meridian Lo. 27 East

Reference
Development and stoping on Ventersdorp Contact Mining Right Area
Reef
Dykes
Development and stoping on Elsburg Individual Reefs
Faults
Development and stoping on Elsburg Massive Reefs
Shafts MAIN SHAFT
Development off Reef
Borehole No. and Surface Position of Old Boreholes Bh.MD 22

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 93

South Deep Gold Mine (continued)

Operating Statistics
  Historic performance
           

Units C2014 C2013 C2012 C2011

Development          
Total development  m 5,526 11,318 12,380 12,018
– Waste development m 652 4,659 6,587 6,214
– Reef development m 4,874 6,659 5,793 5,804
Underground mining (including development)          
Total destress mined m2 29,071 53,694 43,356 24,729
Total mined kt 1,092 2,241 2,050 1,977
– Waste mined kt 65 382 580 480
– Ore mined kt 1,027 1,853 1,470 1,497
Mined grade (ore only) g/t 5.5 5.4 6.1 5.8
Mined grade (ore and waste) g/t 5.1 4.4 4.4 4.4
Gold broken kg 5,598 9,950 8,928 8,719
Processing          
Surface rock dump mining kt 57 45 0 396
SRD value g/t 0.1 0.5 0.0 0.7
Underground ore – mining kt 1,176 1,874 1,558 1,599
Underground ore – value g/t 5.3 5.0 5.4 5.1
Total tonnes treated kt 1,323 2,346 2,106 2,440
Head grade1 g/t 4.9 4.2 4.1 3.7
Yield g/t 4.7 4.0 4.0 3.5
Plant recovery factor % 96.5 96.4 96.5 95.2
Total gold production koz 200.5 302.1 270.4 273.0
Financials          
Exchange rate (annual average) ZAR:USD 10.82 9.60 8.19 7.22
Operating cost ZAR/kg 425,914 328,733 294,895 256,215
ZAR/kg 159,355 206,793 306,238 233,471
Capital expenditure
US$/oz 458 670 1,163 1,005
ZAR/kg 602,363 544,190 – –
All-in Cost (AIC) US$/oz 1,732 1,763 – –
ZAR/kg 538,254 475,706 – –
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC)
US$/oz 1,548 1,541 – –
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 223 224 223 225
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 5.3 5.3 5.5 5.5
Mineral Reserves Moz 38 38 39 40
1
Includes underground waste development from December 2010.
  Rounding off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant. 
  SRD: Surface rock dumps.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
94 Regions, operations and projects

2.3 South Africa region (continued)

Local geology
The South Deep mining right area is underlain by outliers that overlies footwall lithologies of  the Turffontein Subgroup.
of Karoo Supergroup shales and sandstones, followed by The Upper Elsburg reefs, subcrop below the VCR in a north-
the Pretoria Group sediments and the Chuniespoort Group northeast trend, comprise multiple stacked reef horizons
dolomites. The Chuniespoort Group overlies the Klipriviersberg forming an easterly-divergent clastic wedge as illustrated in
Group volcanic rocks, which in turn are underlain by the Central the schematic section below. This wedge attains a thickness
Rand Group that hosts the gold-bearing conglomerates (reefs) of approximately 120m to 130m in the vicinity of the eastern
exploited by South Deep. The reef horizons exploited at South boundary of the mining right area. The Upper Elsburg Reefs
Deep include the Ventersdorp Contact Reef (VCR) and the constitute ~98% of the South Deep Mineral Reserve ounces,
Upper Elsburg formation conglomerates. In the western half of while the VCR makes up the remaining ~2%.
the mining lease area the VCR occurs as a single reef horizon

West-East section of the South Deep Ore Body (Targets linked to mining method)

240m 240m 240m 240m


4 Mine Corridors

4-WEST (4W) 3-WEST (3W) 2-WEST (2W) 1-WEST (1W)

WEST
C4 C3 C2 C1 EAST

VCR
VCR 2m
MBT

MBB
MIQ
MIT
MIB 120m
MAD vertical
MAC
ED
ECT
ECMQ
Targeted reef units ECMC
ECBC
FCB
ECBAQ
ECBA
Target package: 1.5-35m 40-70m 20-60m 20-30m

16 Units

The structure at South Deep is dominated by the north-south fault with a maximum throw of 2,200m down to the west at the
trending primary fault systems, which include the West Rand, northern extreme of the property. The West Rand – Panvlakte
Panvlakte and Waterpan Faults. The West Rand Fault is an horst block is situated between the Kloof Gold Mine to the west
activated thrust fault, which is now represented as a normal and the South Deep Gold Mine to the east.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 95

South Deep Gold Mine (continued)

Geological modelling Exploration and resource definition drilling


Geological models are based on all available structural, Gold Fields initiated an exploration programme, which
grade and sedimentological data. The structural data is comprised a surface 3D reflection seismic survey with
used to generate 3D models whilst the sedimentological, detailed modelling, combined with a surface and underground
gold value and channel width (CW) data is used to delineate drilling programme. The surface drilling programme that
the geologically homogeneous local geo-domains for each targeted the Upper Elsburg and VCR in ground south of the
stratigraphic unit. The geo-domains define the proximal to distal Wrench Fault (SoW), started in July 2007. The quality of the
grade relationships and are used to constrain the statistical resource modelling has continued to evolve at South Deep
and geostatistical analyses that form the basis of the resource since acquisition. Since 2008, 16 discrete stratigraphic units
estimation process. The geological models are updated on an comprising the ore body are individually modelled to provide the
ongoing basis as new data becomes available using proprietary resolution necessary for detailed mine design and scheduling.
software applications.  The geological modelling and resource estimation processes
are supported by a combination of 3D surface seismic
modelling, surface exploration drilling and rolling long-inclined
borehole and grade control drilling programmes.

3D schematic illustration of the South Deep Gold Mine 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
96 Regions, operations and projects

2.3 South Africa region (continued)

Mining
Mining methods
A variety of mining methods are applied to safely maximise the Two new mining concepts will be assested for potential future
extraction of the ore body. West of the subcrop, only the VCR will application. Firstly, a destressing mining method that increases
potentially be mined by low-profile mechanised mining methods. the stoping height to 4.5m and if successful will fully mechanise
the support installation methodology ensuring a safer working
East of the subcrop, the ore body gradually increases environment. Secondly, a method that eliminates the need for
in thickness, from about two metres at the subcrop to destress mining as a separate mining activity. This method
approximately 120m in thickness, 900m east of the subcrop. makes use of long-hole stoping slots mined at a 50 degree
Three different mining methods are applied in this area. Initially, angle to create the destressing effect required for subsequent
low-profile equipment is used to destress the targeted area with development.
2.5-metre cuts that are mined horizontally at 17-metre vertical
intervals. The destress cut is mined to reduce the in situ stress Rock engineering principles are applied to the design of
from approximately 80Mpa to between 30Mpa and 40Mpa. This excavation dimensions, pillars, backfill and support. A review
allows for the mining of large excavations in close proximity to of the dimensions of regional stability pillars is underway
each other, without the high rock stress interaction that could along with associated mining spans and once finalised will be
lead to possible face bursts. Once a targeted area is destressed incorporated in a new reserve design and depletion schedule
it is extracted through either drifting or benching (for targets up during 2015. Both classified cyclone tailings (CCT) and full plant
to 15m in height), or long-hole stoping (for targets > 15-metre tailings (FPT) backfill plants are configured to meet all backfill
in height). requirements into the future.

The major mining areas for the LoM are shown in the schematic
below looking northwest.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 97

South Deep Gold Mine (continued)

Mine planning and scheduling 


Mine design and scheduling at South Deep is done using The following points were also pivotal drivers of the decision to
specialist proprietary mine planning software. All designs are deplete the model:
based on three-dimensional resource models.
Regional Pillars
The depth of the ore body dictates that mining of destress
horizons have to be scheduled such that sufficient Mineral
• An independent Geotechnical Review Board (GRB) was
established during 2014 to review the geotechnical support
Reserves are made available for massive mining extraction.
regime at South Deep and this is still work in progress. Only
Large mechanised targets are then sequentially scheduled for
on completion of the work and subsequent comprehensive
extraction within the destressed envelopes. Backfill scheduling is peer review by year-end, will it be possible to derive any
also incorporated in the extraction sequence, both for destress, conclusions on whether alternative pillar configurations may
and the massive mining. be required at the mine.

All designs and schedules are completed in consultation with Production rates
production and technical personnel to ensure safe and efficient
layouts and plans. Production rates and efficiencies are based • Until the preferred best value option and rebasing of the
on past experience and on production models that describe mine is complete and realistic operating rates and steady
activities for the different fleet combinations. state production is profiled, in conjunction with a supporting
cost model, it will be misleading to select alternatives to the
Due to the inability to split ore and waste mined underground, existing assumptions and report information that remains work
all waste inclusive of in-section waste and capital waste is in progress and not yet validated.
currently being sent to the processing plant at a fully diluted
Timing and constraints on the 2015 Plan and Strategic
head grade. Although the impact on the head grade is larger
Repositioning
in the initial years, the life cycle impact on the LoM grade
is approximately –3%. • Once a strategy and rebasing is agreed upon, new mine
designs and schedules will be completed and based on
Mineral Reserve development, destress stoping, ore handling updated resource models that will become available in the
infrastructure, fleet availability, backfill and operator plus next reporting cycle.
technician skills will continue to be key focus areas for ongoing • This will be the base used for the 2016 operational plan, as
improvement in 2015. well as the December 2015 LoM plan.

Reporting a depleted December 2013 model for the


December 2014 LoM 

Given the mandate for the mine to be afforded the necessary


time to comprehensively review its strategy, business model and
operational execution plan to determine the best value option
way forward for Gold Fields, the decision was taken to declare a
depletion model as the December 2014 Life-of-Mine. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
98 Regions, operations and projects

2.3 South Africa region (continued)

Projects
The following projects are planned for 2015: As previously described, the December 2014 Mineral Resource
and Mineral Reserve estimate was determined by depleting the
• Development on 100 and 105 levels – This development in 2013 Managed Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve with the
an easterly and southerly direction will provide access to the 2014 production.
ore body, additional ore handling facilities (ore passes) plus
increase in the number of airways and cooling infrastructure All Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are classified as
to Current Mine being above infrastructure, in line with international practice
• Construction of 100 2W Bulk Air Cooler where reserves are accessed via ongoing ramps, for which the
• Pilot trials for the 4.5m X 4.5m destress method   planned expenditure has been provided in the LoM.

The Mineral Resources are classified according to the The BBBEE transaction, concluded in December 2010, grants
SAMREC Code 2007. The classification is a function of the an empowerment consortium ~10% of South Deep. Based on
confidence in the full process from drilling, sampling and the relevant sliding scale of the vesting of the economic benefit
geological understanding to geostatistical relationships. The attached to the 10% and the current LoM profile, the Mineral
final classification also takes into account the QA/QC for drilling Resource and Mineral Reserve portion currently attributable to
and sampling. Gold Fields is 91.8%.

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves


Mineral Resources
Mineral Resources are reported as in situ, inclusive of Reserves, of which 100% are reported as Managed Resources. As at
31 December 2014, the total Mineral Resource estimate at the South Deep Gold Mine, using a gold price of  R460 000/kg,
was as follows: 

Mineral Resource classification 


  Tonnes (Mt) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                   

  Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Underground                  
Measured 51.6 52.8 57.6 7.58 7.52 7.01 12,559 12,767 12,983
Indicated 242.4 242.4 267.6 7.27 7.27 6.90 56,658 56,658 59,328
Inferred 26.6 26.6 27.5 7.48 7.48 7.43 6,399 6,399 6,569
Total underground 320.6 321.8 352.7 7.34 7.33 6.96 75,616 75,824 78,880
Surface stockpiles                  
TSF (Measured) 61.8 61.0 59.3 0.22 0.22 0.22 430 425 417
Surface stockpiles                  
Total surface stockpiles 61.8 61.0 59.3 0.22 0.22 0.22 430 425 417
Grand total 382.4 382.8 412.0 6.19 6.20 5.99 76,046 76,249 79,297

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 99

South Deep Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resource classification per mining area (excluding stockpiles)


Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource
                       

Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Area (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz) (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz) (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz) (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz)
Underground                        
Current Mine 43.9 7.47 10,546 13.7 6.27 2,770 – – – 57.6 7.14 13,316
Phase 1 NoW 7.2 7.85 1,806 57.4 7.57 13,964 – – – 64.6 7.60 15,770
Phase 1 SoW – – – 92.7 6.84 20,386 1.9 5.24 314 94.5 6.81 20,699
Phase 2 – –  – 70.7 7.40 16,802 14.6 6.71 3,148 85.2 7.28 19,950
VCR 0.5 12.4 207 8.0 10.70 2,736 10.2 9.00 2,938 18.6 9.82 5,881
Total underground 51.6 7.58 12,559 242.4 7.27 56,658 26.6 7.48 6,399 320.6 7.34 75,616

Modifying factors
• The Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources are inclusive • Mineral Reserve statements include only Measured and
of Mineral Reserves Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral
• Unless otherwise stated, all Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves and contained in the LoM plan 
Reserves are quoted as 100% and are not attributable with • Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo regular
respect to ownership internal and/or external audits, and any issues identified are
• All Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades and rectified at the earliest opportunity
tonnage as delivered to the metallurgical processing facilities
inclusive of in-section waste tonnes, but exclusive of capital
waste material

Dec Dec Dec


  Units 2014 2013 2012
         

Mineral Resource parameters        


US$/oz 1 500 1 500 1650
Mineral Resource gold price
ZAR/kg 460,000 460,000 420,000
Cut-off grade g/t 3.2 – 3.6 3.2 – 3.6 3.0 – 3.5
Mineral Reserve parameters        
US$/oz 1 300 1 300 1 500
Mineral Reserve gold price
ZAR/kg 400,000 400,000 380,000
Cut-off (NoW- SoW) grade g/t 3.8 – 4.2 3.8 – 4.2 3.5 – 4.0
MCF % 98 98 100
Dilution underground % 7.3 7.3 7.6
Losses underground % 3.9 3.9 3.4
Plant recovery factor % 96.5 96.5 96.5
Processing capacity Mtpa 4.0 4.0 4.0

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
100 Regions, operations and projects

2.3 South Africa region (continued)

Grade tonnage curve 


Grade tonnage curve for the total underground Mineral Resource is presented below:  

Grade tonnage curve − Underground


2,000 14.0
1,800
12.0
1,600
1,400 10.0
Tonnes (millions)

1,200 8.0

Grade (g/t)
1,000
800 6.0
600 4.0
400
2.0 Tonnes above cut-off (millions)
200
Average gold grade above cut-off (g/t)
0 0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Cut-off grade (g/t)

Mineral Reserves
The 2013 Mineral Reserve estimation at South Deep was work is undertaken within applicable mine planning software.
based on the development of an appropriately detailed and The 2013 Mineral Reserve was depleted with the 2014
engineered LoM plan, which accounts for all necessary access production, resulting in the following estimate:
development and stope designs. All design and scheduling

Mineral Reserve classification


Tonnes (Mt) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
 
                   

  Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Underground                  
Proved 14.4 15.7 15.6 5.86 5.80 5.75 2,720 2,927 2,888
Probable 208.8 208.8 207.7 5.26 5.26 5.43 35,296 35,297 36,224
Total underground 223.2 224.4 223.3 5.30 5.30 5.45 38,016 38,224 39,112
Grand total 223.2 224.4 223.3 5.30 5.30 5.45 38,016 38,224 39,112

Mineral Reserve classification per mining area 


Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
     

Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Area (Mt) (g/t) (koz) (Mt) (g/t) (koz) (Mt) (g/t) (koz)

Underground                  
Current mine 11.1 5.84 2,078       11.1 5.84 2,078
NoW 3.4 5.92 641 57.3 5.76 10,603 60.7 5.77 11,245
SoW       151.5 5.07 24,693 151.5 5.07 24,693
Total underground 14.4 5.86 2,720 208.8 5.26 35,296 223.2 5.30  38,016
Inclusion of the capital waste material would result in an underground Reserve grade of 5.1g/t.

Mineral Reserves at South Deep are reported at head grade waste is currently excluded as there is a potential to separate it
inclusive of ore and in-section ore and waste development in the ore flow north of wrench. If  included in the ore flow for the
tonnes, which cannot be separated in the ore flow. The capital LoM, the impact on the Reserve grade would be 0.2g/t.  

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 101

South Deep Gold Mine (continued)

Factors that affected Mineral


Resource and Mineral Reserve Competent Person
reconciliation YEAR-ON-YEAR  Internal technical reviews have been conducted by
the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-time
• Mined depletion only employees of Gold Fields Limited.

HJ Keyser: Manager Mine Planning and Resource


Management
Person responsible for the overall correctness,
Mineral Reserve sensitivity   standard and compliance of this declaration. MEng
The Mineral Reserve sensitivity was derived from the application Mining Engineering, GDE, ND Survey NHD MRM,
of the relevant cut-off grades to individual grade tonnage SACNASP (Registration number: 400284/06)
curves.  Manie has 21 years’ experience in the mining industry.
He is the lead Competent
The Mineral Reserve sensitivities (other than that for the base
case) are not based on detailed depletion schedules and R Pillaye: Chief Geologist
should be considered on a relative and indicative basis only. BSc (Hons) Geology, SACNASP (Registration number:
The following graph indicates the Managed Mineral Reserve 400247/08)
sensitivity at -15%, -10%, -5%, Base (ZAR400,000/kg), +5%,
Rugen has 24 years’ experience in the mining industry
+10%, +15% and +25% to the gold price.  and is responsible for production geology at South
Deep.

N King: Chief Resource Geologist


Mineral Reserve Sensitivity BSc (Hons) Geology, GDE, SACNASP (Registration
50 number: 400166/07)
40
Nick has 24 years’ experience in the mining industry.
He is currently responsible for the resource geology at
Gold (Moz)

30

20 South Deep.
10
A Miller: Chief Surveyor
0 ND (Mine Survey), Mine Survey Certificate of
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25%
Competency, PLATO (Registration number: PMS 0191)
Gold price (base R400,000/kg)
Angus has 34 years’ experience in the mining industry.
He is responsible for surveying, reporting and historical
modifying factors at South Deep.

Z Letshuti: Manager Operational Planning


NHD (Mine Survey), Mine Survey Certificate
of Competency, Associate Member of IMSSA
(Registration number: MST 0047)

Zach has 29 years’ experience in the mining industry.


He is responsible for operational planning and
reporting. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
102 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region

Host to world-class gold deposits


and a premier mining destination.
Gold Fields has a strong presence
in the region, with the Tarkwa and
Damang mines being configured to
deliver value and explore growth
opportunities to support the Ghana

Gold Fields vision  

The West Africa region Mineral Resources

currently accounts for 14%


of the gold Mineral Resource 14.8 million ounces 
and 17% of the gold Mineral Mineral Reserves
Reserve base, excluding
growth projects. 8.7 million ounces 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 103

Damang Gold Mine


Mineral Resources

5.3 million ounces


Mineral Reserves MALI

1.2 million ounces


• Turnaround at Damang was sustained through 2014
• Re-assessing all options at Damang across the entire mining lease to
derive a strategy to drive the best cash-generative plan
• The full mining lease underwent a prospectivity assessment in 2014 to
identify and rank brownfield opportunities. A strike of 8km contiguous
to the Damang pit provides upside potential with a further 15km of
BURKINO FASO
strike trending south-west toward Tarkwa reflecting a prospective
corridor for ongoing near-mine exploration. Following this assessment,
a three-year phased exploration programme has been profiled that will
commence in 2015. BENIN
• LoM extended to 2020 (six years).

IVORY
COAST TOGO
Tarkwa Gold Mine
Mineral Resources GHANA
9.6 million ounces Accra
Mineral Reserves 

7.5 million ounces


• Solid and consistent anchor for growth in the West Africa region
• Owner-operated, high-volume, grade-driven surface operation Atlantic Ocean
• Low-margin reserves removed from the plan
• Maintaining capital waste strip rates to secure a steady flow of consistent
grade ore
• Focus on maintaining high mining fleet and processing efficiencies
• Life-of-Mine extends to 2031 (17 years).

  Operational profiles
 

  Damang   Tarkwa
     
     

Mining method Open-pit Open-pit


Infrastructure Four open pits and one CIL gold plant with an Four open pits and one CIL gold plant with a capacity of
upgraded capacity of ~4.5Mtpa 13.5Mtpa
Mineralisation style Hydrothermal (orogenic) and palaeoplacer  Palaeoplacer
Mineralisation i. Mineralisation hosted by structural i. Mineralisation hosted by conglomerates
characteristics shears and fault zones
ii. Confined to well-defined prospective ii. Laterally continuous with mid to long-range
structural belts predictability
iii. Mineralisation within pods with short- iii. Clear patterns of mineralisation governed by
range predictability sedimentary characteristics
vi. Exploration and resource definition iv. Exploration programmes ongoing to test homogeneity
programmes required to define the of geology and grade domains
mineralisation controls and continuity
v. Palaeoplacer characteristics are the    
same as for Tarkwa

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
104 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Resilient Regional overview Electricity Company of Ghana (ECG) in 2015, and


the long-term security of a competitively priced
Mineral The Gold Fields attributable portion of the Mineral
Resources and Mineral Reserves for Tarkwa and
energy supply will therefore remain an important
area of focus. The GENSER Energy Limited (power
Reserve Damang is 90%, with the remaining 10% held
purchase agreement) option to secure power is
by the Ghanaian government as a free carried
base interest.
behind schedule, but is expected to be on line
in 2016.
increased The West Africa region’s Mineral Resource base
Regional geology
by 5% has decreased from 16.9 million ounces to
14.8 million ounces (-12%) net of depletion. The The ore bodies are located within the Tarkwaian
year-on- total Mineral Reserve has increased from 8.3 System, which is an important stratigraphic

year million ounces to 8.7 million ounces (+5%), net of


mined depletion.
component of the Ashanti Belt in south-western
Ghana. The Ashanti Belt is a north-easterly striking,
broadly synclinal structure made up of lower
Gold Fields West Africa region operations are proterozoic sediments and volcanics underlain
located in the southern area of western Ghana, by the metavolcanics and metasediments of the
300 kilometres by road west of the capital of Birimian System. The Tarkwaian unconformably
Accra and approximately 90km north of the port overlies the Birimian, and is characterised
city of Takoradi. The ore bodies are located in the by lower-intensity metamorphism and the
West African Craton, near the southern end of the predominance of coarse-grained, immature
Tarkwa Basin. They occupy a significant portion sedimentary units.
of the stratigraphy of the Ashanti Belt, which hosts
the important Birimian and Tarkwaian geological Exploration drilling and expenditure
series. During the reporting period, exploration
activities in the region were dominated by
Damang, which is located 25 kilometres
resource conversion projects through infill-
north-north-east of the Tarkwa Gold Mine,
drilling and extensions to known targets at
exploits predominantly fresh hydrothermal
Damang. No greenfields projects were drilled in
mineralisation and limited oxides, in addition
2014. A geochemical soil sampling programme
to palaeoplacer mineralisation similar to that
was carried out at Tarkwa in 2014 to explore part
of the Tarkwa Gold Mine. The hydrothermal
of the concession, which previously had limited
mineralisation occurs at the culmination of
exploration.
a regional anticline and is associated with
dominantly east-dipping thrust faults and sub- In accordance with the SAMREC 2007 Code,
horizontal quartz veins. rigorous QA/QC protocols are maintained on
all exploration programmes. Leading industry
The ore body at Tarkwa consists of a succession
practice for data acquisition is applied and
of stacked tabular palaeoplacer units consisting of
accredited laboratories, which are regularly
quartz pebble conglomerates (gravel beds called
reviewed both internally and externally, are utilised.
‘reefs’) that are very similar to those mined in the
Analytical QA/QC is maintained and monitored
Witwatersrand Basin in South Africa. Tarkwa is
through the submission of blanks, certified
currently mining multiple narrow reef horizons from
reference material and duplicates plus umpire
four open pits.
laboratory checks.
Significant electricity tariff increases are expected
from the Volta River Authority (VRA) and the

  December 2014 December 2013


         

Metres US$ Metres US$


Exploration drilling drilled  (millions) drilled  (millions)

Operations        
Damang 26,155 3.82 20,204 2.93
Tarkwa – 0.17   0.19
Total West Africa operations 26,155 3.99 20,204 3.11
Exclusive of grade control drilling.        

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 105

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves cut-off within a diluted optimised pit shell (inclusive of any
material below the cut-off grade required to be mined to extract
The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves declared are the complete pay portion) and constrained to an optimised
classified as described in the SAMREC Code. minimum mining width shape.

Mineral Resources Mineral Reserves


Mineral Resource categories (Measured, Indicated or Inferred) The Mineral Reserve estimates are based on appropriately
are assigned with consideration given to geological complexity, detailed and engineered LoM plans. All design and scheduling
grade variance, drill hole intersection spacing, and mining work is undertaken to an appropriate level of detail by
development. Mineral Resources are further tested through the experienced engineers using appropriate mine planning
application of realistic modifying factors to ensure that there is a software. The planning process incorporates appropriate
reasonable prospect of eventual economic extraction. Open pit modifying factors and the use of cut-off grades and other
Mineral Resources comprise the material above the nominated techno-economic investigations.

West Africa region summary: Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve statement1 for operational mines

  Mineral Resources (100%)   Mineral Reserves (100%)


       

  31 December 2014 Dec 2013   31 December 2014 Dec 2013

Measured, Indicated Tonnes Grade Gold Gold Proved Tonnes Grade Gold Gold
and Inferred (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz) and Probable  (Mt) (g/t) (Moz) (Moz)

Total Damang 85.3 1.92 5.260 6.579 Total Damang 25.7 1.49 1.235 1.073
Tarkwa Open-pit 193.7 1.39 8.679 9.425 Tarkwa Open-pit 157.4 1.30 6.601 6.407
Tarkwa Stockpiles 65.0 0.43 0.889 0.866 Tarkwa Stockpiles 65.0 0.43 0.889 0.866
Total West Africa 344.0 1.34 14.828 16.870 Total West Africa 248.1 1.09 8.725 8.346
Mineral Resources are inclusive of Mineral Reserves. All tonnes (t) relate to metric units. Rounding-off of figures may result in minor computational discrepancies, where this happens it is not
deemed significant. In West Africa (Damang and Tarkwa) the Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves were determined using a gold price of US$1,500/oz and US$1,300/oz respectively.
1
Managed, unless otherwise stated.

Social licence to operate to be commissioned in 2016 to address grid supply shortfalls


at lower tariff rates and the ISO 50001:2011 system is planned
Both the Tarkwa and Damang mines comply with the local and
to be rolled out as a continuous energy efficiency management
international environmental and safety management systems
programme. An energy and carbon management strategy is in
and regulations. They are ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001
place and the plan ensures that energy intensity improvements
certified, as well as being certified to the International Cyanide
have traction and positively impact the LoM plan. A water
Management Code.
strategy and mine water management plan is integrated into
Gold Fields Ghana (GFG) operations received approval LoM planning and funding is scheduled where appropriate to
from the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 2014 for deliver the plan.
embankment wall raises for TSF 2 and 3 at Tarkwa. Approval
GFG continued its outstanding performance in Corporate
for the TSF 5 construction is expected by Q3 2015. Tarkwa’s
Social Responsibility. However, the lower gold price and lower
updated Environmental Management Plan (EMP 2014-2017) has
dissolution rates, which resulted in the decommissioning of
been reviewed by the EPA and is being updated for submission
the heap leach operations in 2014, reduced opportunities for
and final approval. The updated Environmental Management
employment and the implementation of socio-economic projects
Plan (EMP 2014-2017) for Damang was submitted to the EPA in
in host communities. An upsurge of illegal artisanal mining
Q2 2014. Response from the EPA is yet to be received. The EPA,
(ASM) occurred specifically at the Damang mine. This risk has
however, recognises the submission of the document as meeting
been minimised through transparent engagement, the building
the legal and compliance requirements. 
of strong relationships of trust and working together with the
The security of energy supply and cost is a key underpin to communities to identify high-impact Shared Value projects. 
sustainability in Ghana. The Genser project (IPP) is expected

           

Total
Recordable
Fatal Injury Injury Energy CO2 emissions Water
Frequency Frequency consumption (000 tonnes) withdrawal
Sustainability factors Rate Rate (TJ) (scope 1 & 2) (million litres)
           

           

C2014  – 1.54 1,138 79.7 1,390


Damang
C2013  – 1.27 1,373 97.0 2,069
C2014  – 0.52 3,357 237.6 3,500
Tarkwa
C2013  – 0.83 3,992 284.7 6,251

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
106 regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Damang Gold Mine  


www.goldfields.com

GENERAL LOCATION 

Damang is located in south-western Ghana, approximately 300km by road west of Accra, the capital, at latitude 5°11’N and longitude
1°57’W. The Damang concession lies to the north of and joins the Tarkwa concession, which is located near the town of Tarkwa. The
area is served by access roads with established infrastructure, and a main road connects the mine to the port of Takoradi, some 90km
to the south-east. 

Asset fundamentals
The Damang concession covers a total area of 25,016 hectares. All necessary statutory mining
authorisations and permits are in place for the Damang mine lease, and Abosso Goldfields is
LICENCE STATUS entitled to mine all material falling within the lease. Abosso Goldfields holds a mining lease in
AND HOLDINGS respect of the Damang mine dated 19 April 1995, as amended by an agreement dated 4 April 1996.
This lease expires in 2025, but is renewable under its terms and the provisions of the Minerals and
Mining Law, by agreement between Abosso Goldfields and the Government of Ghana.

The Damang plant processes mainly fresh ore with approximately 5% oxides, which is sourced from
four open-pit mining operations and existing surface stockpiles, located on the Damang mine lease.
The plant, which has a throughput of 4.2Mtpa, is being upgraded to 4.5Mtpa and is a conventional
OPERATIONAL
two-stage grinding circuit using a SAG and ball mill combination, with pebble crusher and gravity
INFRASTRUCTURE,
concentration, followed by a Carbon in Leach recovery process. Gravity gold is collected and
MINERAL PROCESSING
treated by the Knelson Gravity concentrators; and an In-line Leach Reactor (ILR).
AND TSF CAPACITY
The East Tailing Storage Facility (ETSF) with additional lifts supports the LoM plan to August
2016 and then 2016 to 2020 is catered for by the Far East Tailing Storage Facility (FETSF), where
permitting is already in place for the initial lifts.

A tropical climate, characterised by two distinct rainy seasons from March to July and September
to November. Average annual rainfall in the area is 2,030 millimetres. Although there may be minor
CLIMATE
disruptions to operations during the wet season, there is no operating or long-term constraint on
production due to climate. 

The Damang ore body is hosted by a north to north-easterly plunging antiform, developed within
Tarkwaian sediments. The main Damang pit is located close to the closure of the antiform, and all
DEPOSIT TYPE other known mineralisation is located on the east and west limbs of the Damang anticline. The mine
exploits fresh hydrothermal and oxide mineralisation in addition to Witwatersrand-style, palaeoplacer
mineralisation.

LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM) It is estimated that the current Mineral Reserve will be depleted in 2020 (six years).

Damang retained its OHSAS 18001:2007 (Safety Management system) certificate following the
ENVIRONMENTAL/ recertification audit conducted in June 2012. Damang is ISO 14001-compliant and holds regulatory
HEALTH AND SAFETY  Certificates for Environmental Compliance. Permits have also been issued for new infrastructure at
the Huni Waste Dump and FETSF.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 107

Brief history of Damang The fall in the gold price in 2013 resulted in the Greater
Damang project being placed on hold, with the operation being
Late 19th – mid 20th century
restructured to maintain viability during the expected period of
Several small mining companies operated the Abontiakoon low gold price. Consequently, the current LoM has been reduced
concession near Tarkwa town, leading to the sinking of eight to six years. 
vertical shafts and the excavation of numerous open pits.
In 1882 operations at the underground Abosso mine exploited Key developments
banket conglomerates to a depth of 850m. In 1920, Adjah Bippo
• The restructuring and business improvement initiatives
and Cinnamon Bippo underground mines to the north were
implemented across the whole of Damang started yielding
incorporated into the Abosso mine holdings. By 1956 Abosso
positive results in Q4 2013 and the turnaround continued
mine ceased operation with recorded production of 2.7Moz at
on through 2014. The focus on employee health and safety,
an average grade of 9.8g/t.
operational efficiencies, mining mix, grade management
and key activity costs has transformed Damang back to
Late 20th – early 21st century
commercial levels of production with a realistic time frame
In 1989 Ranger Exploration (Ranger) began an investigation
now available to bring additional brownfield opportunities
of retreating tailings from the Abosso mine. Following a drilling
to account. 
programme and subsequent feasibility study from 1993 to 1996,
• A three year phased exploration programme has been
mining of a mineralised quartz vein system to a depth of 200m
designed to test prioritised targets that show the potential to
was shown to be viable. Open-pit operations commenced in
deliver cash generative ounces to the LoM plan to replace
August 1997 on the main pit, following the relocation of 3,000
depletion, increase flexibility and grow the reserve base.
people. Gold production started in November at the 3.0Mtpa
Targets are prioritised if they represent extensions to active
capacity CIL plant. In 2001 Gold Fields and Repadre signed
pits or known ore bodies in reasonable proximity to the Plant
an agreement to purchase Ranger’s 90% interest in Damang.
and are favoured if they are hydrothermal in style due to their
IAMGold and Repadre merged to give IAMGold an 18.9%
generally higher gold grades.
interest in Damang and Gold Fields a 71.1% interest.
• Near-mine exploration continued at Huni, Saddle and Juno
The Damang Expansion Project was initiated to identify South. Tomento North drilling and modelling was completed in
additional sources of ore from areas around the main pit. 2014 and further infill-drilling planned to refine the geological
Following further drilling, a feasibility study was initiated to test domains and identify pay shoots is scheduled for 2015
the viability of a cut-back to extend the life of the main pit. • The Mineral Reserves at Damang increased from 1.1 million
Following the approval of the capital expenditure, the Damang ounces to 1.2 million ounces, net of depletion, as a result of
pit cut-back (DPCB) and waste mining commenced in July 2005. the inclusion of Amoanda and Huni Cut-back 2.
A regional prospectivity study was completed in November • The mine re-positioned well in 2014 and remains dedicated
2005. In 2006 Mineral Resource estimation was carried out in to achieving targeted head grades and sustaining plant
the Rex, Tomento North, Tomento East, Tomento West and Huni throughput to deliver increased ounces and stabilise the All-in
areas. The initial Amoanda Pit was finally depleted in August Cost per ounce.
2006. In 2010, drilling and Mineral Resource estimation was • Advance Grade Control (AGC) drilling programmes have
carried out at Amoanda North, Rex, Huni and Juno. continued with the objective of de-risking the operational plan
and keeping 9 to 12 months of production within the AGC
An updated conceptual extensional Resource Model was window on a rolling basis.
developed for Greater Damang pit (Huni, Damang, Main and • Mining is designed to prioritise extraction from the pits with the
Juno) in 2011. Portions of the Phase II drilling programme were highest economic value and is focussed on the Huni, Saddle
completed and incorporated into the Greater Damang PFS with and Juno areas.
a resultant increase in Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve • The Mineral Reserves declared as at 31 December 2014 are
ounces. During Q1 of that year, the mine moved to owner mining constrained by the existing ETSF adjacent to the Damang pit,
and maintenance. Gold Fields Ghana Limited acquired the and exclude Mineral Resources from the Cut-back 2 pit area,
indirect 18.9% IAMGold interest in Damang and consequently which are not economically viable in the current configuration
holds 90% with the remaining 10% held by the Ghanaian at US$1,300/oz.
government. • Re-assessment of all options across the entire mining lease
will continue in 2015 to determine the best business case
2012 saw the prefeasibility study continue for Greater to improve cash flow. This will include potential extensions
Damang following the completion of the Phase ll drilling to the Amoanda and Tomento open pits, testing potential at
campaigns. Resource in-fill and geotechnical drilling Nyame and Chida, as well as a review of underground options
programmes were completed on the Greater Damang Extension compared against the existing Cut-back 2 option.
Project. In-fill drilling and modelling of the Greater Amoanda
Project was completed.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
108 Regions, operations and projects

170000E

180000E

190000E
N

100000N 100000N

Huni Pit
Subiri PL
Saddle (Damang Cut Back 2)
West Damang
New Damang Damang Pit
East Tailings Storage Facility

Juno Pit
Far East Tailings Storage Facility
New Kyekyewere
Tomento North
Nyame Kwesie Pits
Tomento Pit
and South Tailings Storage Facility
Waste Dump
90000N Lima Pit 90000N
Old Huni Tomento West
Valley Camp Lima
Amoanda
Tomento East
Bonsa North

Amoanda Pit and Waste Dump


Nohokoa

Chida
Rex North

Chida South

Rex
Rex South Epieso PL
Bonsa

Overlap Wassa Hydrothermal

Area Breman PL Epieso


Wassa Breman
80000N 80000N

Abosso Deeps

Bonsa River Forest


Reserve PL
Abosso Town

PLAN SHOWING DAMANG MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014

0 1 2 3 4 5

Kilometres
170000E

190000E
180000E

Ghana National Grid Co-ordinate System

Reference
Roads Tailings Storage Facility
National Railway Open-pit
Mining Lease Waste Dumps
Mining Lease Lima South Exploration Sites/Projects
Prospecting Licences (PL) Damang claims the area from surface to 30m below
Tarkwa claims the area from below 30m from surface

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 109

Damang Gold Mine (continued)

Operating statistics 
  Historic performance
 

  Units C2014  C2013  C2012  C2011 

Open-pit mining          
Total mined kt 19,191 30,145 33,502 23,515
– Waste mined kt 15,310 26,140 29,192 18,735
– Ore mined kt 3,880 4,006 4,310 4,780
Mined grade g/t 1.34 1.24 1.53 1.76
Strip ratio (tonnes) waste:ore 3.95 6.53 6.77 3.92
Processing          
Mill tonnes kt 4,044 3,837 4,416 4,942
Mill head grade g/t 1.50 1.40 1.29 1.49
Yield g/t 1.37 1.24 1.17 1.37
Plant recovery factor % 91.0 89.2 90.2 91.9
Total gold production koz 178 153 166 218
Financials          
Operating cost US$/oz 999 1,118 946 651
Capital expenditure US$/oz 16 327 732 510
All-in Sustaining Costs US$/oz 1,176 1,558    
Mineral Reserves
Mineral Reserves Mt 25.7 22.8 76.1 61.7
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 1.49 1.46 1.67 1.71
Mineral Reserves Moz 1.2 1.1 4.1 3.4
Rounding-off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
110 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Local geology Hydrothermal mineralisation

The Damang ore bodies are located within the Tarkwaian Hydrothermal gold mineralisation at Damang occurs in pyrite
sediments, which form a major portion of the stratigraphy and pyrrhotite alteration selvages, which are usually less than
of the Ashanti Belt in south-west Ghana. The Ashanti Belt is one-metre wide and located immediately adjacent to en-echelon
a north-easterly striking, broadly synclinal structure made quartz veins. Gold is also associated with accessory vein
up of Lower Proterozoic sediments and volcanics underlain minerals such as carbonate, muscovite, tourmaline, ilmenite and
by the metavolcanics and metasediments of the Birimian apatite. These alteration zones are often linked, and may result
system. The Tarkwaian unconformably overlies the Birimian, in significant volumes, characterised by intense veining and gold
and is characterised by lower intensity metamorphism and the mineralisation.
predominance of coarse-grained, immature sedimentary units.
Damang is unique in Ghana by virtue of having hydrothermal
Damang mine exploits fresh hydrothermal and oxide mineralisation hosted in the quartzites of the Tarkwaian banket
mineralisation in addition to palaeoplacer material. footwall, as opposed to the metavolcanics and metasediments of
The hydrothermal mineralisation is located in Tarkwaian the Birimian Basement, as seen at Prestea, Bogoso and Obuasi.
sediments and is the only deposit of its kind located on the To date, no significant hydrothermal mineralisation has been
eastern side of the Ashanti Belt in south-west Ghana. encountered in the Birimian lithologies at Damang.

The Damang ore body is hosted by a north-easterly plunging Exploration and resource definition drilling
antiform, developed within Tarkwaian sediments. The main Exploration drill programmes are designed to assess the
Damang pit is located near to the closure of the antiform, and all magnitude and style of mineralisation. Reverse circulation (RC)
other known palaeoplacer mineralisation is located on the east drilling, using a 100m x 100m grid, is usually employed for initial
and west limbs of the Damang anticline. exploration drill-testing of both palaeoplacer and hydrothermal
styles of mineralisation. To optimise exploration spend, diamond
The stratigraphy at Damang is primarily within the Tarkwaian drilling is minimised in the initial exploration stages and it is
Group and comprises a large-scale fining upwards sequence used to establish stratigraphic and structural relationships, while
of clastic sediments, interrupted by up to four major gold- allowing samples to be collected for metallurgical test work.
bearing quartz-pebble conglomerate horizons. This sequence
unconformably overlies a mixed Birimian Supergroup basement, 2014 Drilling
comprising volcaniclastic units, minor fine-grained clastic Although no greenfields exploration projects were carried out
sediments and black shales. during 2014, a number of resource infill and advanced-grade
control drilling programmes were conducted at the various pits
Palaeoplacer mineralisation
that encompass the Greater Damang ore body. The current
There are three gold-bearing conglomerate horizons recognised phase of RC and diamond drilling was completed at the Huni,
on the western limb of the Damang anticline. From footwall Saddle and Juno pits to increase the confidence levels in the
to hangingwall on the west limb, these are known as the Star/ geological and resource models that will be mined over the next
Composite, Malta/Breccia and Gulder Reefs. There are also two years. The drilling programmes are described in more detail
three gold-bearing conglomerate horizons recognised on the under the section on projects.
eastern limb, namely the Lima, Kwesie-K1 and Kwesie-K2
Reefs. These conglomerate horizons are separated by poorly Damang maintains rigorous quality assurance and quality
mineralised sandstone units. control (QA/QC) protocols on all of its exploration programmes,
using leading industry practice in data acquisition, reputable
The reefs are usually characterised by a fining upwards accredited laboratories for analytical data, and ensuring sign-
sequence of poorly to moderately sorted, clast-supported off by Competent Persons under the 2007 SAMREC Code.
polymictic conglomerates. However, local variations are The results of laboratory internal QA/QC assays provide
observed where the conglomerate domain is interbedded secondary validation to accompany the GFG quality control
with fine to coarse-grained, poorly sorted sandstones. The programme.
conglomerate reefs may contain between 1.3g/t and 1.5g/t gold,
and the poorly mineralised sandstone units usually contain
between 0.1g/t and 0.2g/t gold.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 111

Damang Gold Mine (continued)

Mining Mine planning and scheduling


The Mineral Resource, based on the composite IK (‘Indicator
Mining at Damang has been conducted on an owner
Kriging’) resource modelling technique, forms the basis for
maintenance and owner mining basis since March 2011 and
subsequent design, planning and extraction scheduling as
is carried out using conventional open-pit methods.
incorporated into the LoM plan. This is completed using a
Load and haul is undertaken using a standard truck-shovel combination of commercial software packages.
operation, with five excavators in backhoe configuration.
A detailed one-year operating and capital cost budget is
The haulage fleet consists of 26 Caterpillar 777F dump trucks,
produced and forms the basis for the LoM production schedule.
with an average payload capacity of 100 tonnes each, together
The operational plan is established on zero-based costing and
with eight D9T Caterpillar track dozers. The drill rigs comprise
utilises historically achieved data for productivity and operating
nine DP1500 Pantera rigs within the current equipment fleet.
costs. All capital projects are ranked and prioritised to maximise
The primary excavation rate is approximately 700 to 900kBCM/
capital efficiency and return on investment.
month. Off-highway trucks haul ore to the RoM pad and waste
dumps. A fleet of tipper trucks operated by a contractor,
Open-pit planning involves the input of economic parameters
reclaims stockpiled ore and transports it to the treatment plant.
and physical constraints into optimisation software to generate
a series of nested pits from which an optimal shell is selected.
Ancillary equipment includes bulldozers, graders, water trucks
Detailed design is then undertaken to confirm the mineability of
and service truck vehicles, which support the drill-and-blast and
the optimised shell. The process is iterated until an acceptable
haulage operations with vehicle, road and bench maintenance
level of correlation is achieved between the optimised shell
plus dust and erosion control.
and detailed design. The relatively small dimension of the pits
The Damang plant processes mainly fresh and limited oxide and the characteristics of the ore bodies, combined with the
ore, which is sourced from four open pits and existing surface equipment size, make the pit design exercise critical when it
stockpiles, located on the Damang mine lease. comes to keeping strip ratios in line with optimisation results.

Mining methods Various standard mine planning and design software packages
Fresh rock and transitional zones are traditionally drilled and are used and the mine plans are based on three-dimensional
blasted in six-metre lifts, with excavation in three-metre flitches. block models of in situ mineralisation. Allowances are made
Conventional (nonel) detonators are used in both fresh and oxide for minimum mining widths, dilution and ore loss appropriate to
material. Oxide material, which cannot be ’free-dug’, is blasted the mining method under consideration. Historical performance
using lower powder factors. Waste material is hauled to planned measures are also used to determine these modifying factors.
dumps that are located close to the pit exit.

Damang has a progressive reclamation plan, in which inactive


areas are immediately rehabilitated through contouring and
replacement of topsoil, seeding, planting and fertilisation.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
112 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Projects
The primary objectives of this year’s exploration drilling Tomento North
campaign were to:  The area to the north of Tomento Pit 1 is prospective for
palaeoplacer mineralisation and an initial programme of
• enhance the understanding of the geology and controls on
14 holes (80m x 100m grid) was planned and drilled. The drilling
grade distribution.
programme targeted the northern strike and dip extent of the
• increase confidence in the Mineral Resource models.
Tomento Pit 1 ore body. After completion, the evaluation exercise
• complete scout drilling in 2014 to direct drilling in 2015. 
provided an Indicated Mineral Resource of 16,000 ounces
The areas drilled were the Huni, Saddle, Juno East and South, at 1.68g/t.
Tomento North, Amoanda and Tamang projects. A total of
The programme was later extended to include 10 infill holes to
26,155m (including 15,492m RC and 10,662m DD) were drilled
refine the geological domains and identify payshoots and in
during the year.
total 1,699m RC and 4,247m diamond drilling was completed.
A target generation and ranking exercise was done using Additional infill-drilling is planned for 2015.
airborne magnetics/radio metrics and soil geochemical
Juno South and East
anomalies to establish a pipeline of brownfield projects
for Damang. The aim of the exercise was to identify (and The Juno South and East project is the extension of the
subsequently develop) projects that fit Damang’s turnaround hydrothermal and palaeoplacer mineralisation currently mined
strategy, which includes replacing depletion and increasing the in the Juno Pit. During 2014, 32 holes were drilled to test
mines Mineral Reserves to a level providing operational flexibility. the continuity of the ore body on dip and on strike, in which
3,393m RC and 2,096m diamond drilling were completed.
Huni Pit  Although most of the assay results are still pending, early
Below the Huni pit floor, the Banket Conglomerate horizon, which indications are that both hydrothermal and palaeoplacer
has been extensively mined in the Damang pit, is considered to mineralisation extends further to the south. In view of the
be the best target for gold mineralisation in the Huni ore body. success of this programme, an infill-drilling programme is
During 2013, a programme of Advance Grade Control (AGC) planned for 2015.
holes on an initial 40m x 64m grid was initiated and planned to
Tamang 
be drilled to a depth of 50m below the pit floor to build a short-
term resource model and thereby increase confidence levels in The Tamang project is the southern extension of the Juno
the near-term resources. The programme’s drill spacing was South Project, with known hydrothermal and palaeoplacer
subsequently reduced to 20m x 32m and later to 10m x 16m in mineralisation. In 2014, six RC-scout holes were drilled (436m) to
places in order to be in line with the AGC spacing of the other align and plan the 2015 exploration programme. Quartz veining
pits. The drilling programme of 495 metres of diamond drilling in the Banket Quartzite returned encouraging gold grades but
was completed in 2014 and the resource models up-dated. the intrusives were barren.

Saddle Pit Prospect Leases

The Saddle Pit was an integral part of the 2014 Operational Applications to renew the PL’s for Subiri, Wassa Breman and
Plan and for that reason a programme of resource infill holes Epieso were submitted in May 2012 but were never finalised as
was planned and drilled to increase confidence levels in the no exploration was planned or carried out on the tenements at
geological and evaluation models of the pit. During 2014, that time. Further applications to the Mineral Commission will be
10 boreholes for 1,288m were drilled, which returned very expedited as and when selected prospect leases are required to
encouraging gold grades that have been incorporated in the facilitate additional near-mine exploration.
2014 Mineral Resource declaration. A single deep hole (456m),
drilled to explore for Damang ore body extensions on the
down-thrown block to the west of the Damang Fault, was also
completed in 2014 but was unsuccessful.

Amoanda North
Historical mining of the Amoanda ore body showed an increase
in tonnes when mined compared to resource models. A
reconciliation study has been completed using 77 new holes
totalling 12,043m, confirming appropriate modifying factors to be
used in mine planning.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 113

Damang Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves and used to compile the LoM plan, taking into account pit
limitations, haul road distance and plant capacity. Economic
The Damang Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve have been
and scenario models underpin the Mineral Reserve declaration,
updated using the current Gold Fields planning gold price
while internal and external audits and peer reviews ensure
of US$1,500/oz and US$1,300/oz respectively and reported
consistency and compliance with regulatory practices. 
in accordance with SAMREC Code. The impacts of year-on-
year changes are discussed in the reconciliation section. Mineral Resources
This declaration is based on well-defined and robust mineral
Mineral Resources are quoted at an appropriate in situ economic
reporting practices. Ongoing assaying of RC and diamond
cut-off grade, with tonnages and grades based on the relevant
drilling with grade control samples provides additional grade
Mineral Resource block models. They also include estimates of
and geological data, which is incorporated into a detailed
any material below the cut-off grade that needs to be mined to
evaluation model.
extract the complete pay portion of the Mineral Resource. 

Updated pit designs and schedules are compiled and evaluated


based on the most recent technical and economic parameters,

Mineral Resource classification 


  Tonnes (000 t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
                   

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit                  
Measured  8,392 4,600 9,340 1.80 2.05 1.94 485 303 584
Indicated 67,996 75,700 96,100 1.96 2.16 2.01 4,285 5,252 6,205
Inferred 5,018 12,100 21,540 2.40 2.41 2.26 388 938 1,565
Total open-pit
and underground 81,406 92,400 126,980 1.97 2.19 2.05 5,158 6,494 8,355
Surface stockpiles 3,870 3,400 2,600 0.82 0.78 0.89 102 86 74
Total surface stockpiles  3,870 3,400 2,600 0.82 0.78 0.89 102 86 74
Grand total 85,276 95,800 129,580 1.92 2.14 2.02 5,260 6,579 8,429

Mineral Resource classification per area  


  Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource
                         

   Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Area (kt) (g/t) (000 oz) (kt) (g/t) (000 oz) (kt) (g/t) (000 oz) (kt) (g/t) (000 oz)

Open-pit                         
DPCB 2 4,553 1.86 273 22,800 2.19 1,605 4,123 2.48 328 31,476 2.18 2,206
Huni 974 1.66 52 6,691 1.47 317 – – – 7,665 1.50 369
Huni Saddle 1,281 1.98 82 12,740 2.30 941 747 2.26 54 14,768 2.27 1,077
Juno 1,584 1.53 78 8,001 1.95 502 31 1.85 2 9,616 1.88 582
Amoanda – – – 5,291 2.08 354 29 2.01 2 5,320 2.08 356
Rex – – – 9,678 1.48 462 88 0.09 2 9,766 1.48 464
Tomento East – – – 500 1.21 20 – – – 500 1.21 20
Abosso Tails – – – 1,401 1.12 51 – – – 1,401 1.12 51
Lima South – – – 591 0.96 18 – – – 591 0.96 18
Tomento North – – – 303 1.68 16 – – – 303 1.68 16
Total open-pit 8,392  1.80 485 67,996 1.96 4,285  5,018 2.40 388 81,406  1.97 5,158
Stockpiles – – – 3,870 0.82 102       3,870 0.82 102
Grand total 8,392 1.80 485 71,866 1.90 4,387 5,018 2.40 388 85,276 1.92 5,260

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
114 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Modifying factors
• The Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources are inclusive of those Mineral Resources modified to produce Mineral Reserves
• Unless otherwise stated, all Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are quoted as 100% managed and are not attributable with
respect to ownership
• All Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades and tonnages as delivered to the metallurgical processing facilities, and
are therefore fully diluted
• Mineral Reserve statements include only Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources, modified to produce Mineral Reserves and
contained in the LoM plan

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves have undergone internal audits during the current year.

  Units December 2014  December 2013 December 2012

Mineral Resource parameters        


Mineral Resource gold price US$/oz 1,500 1,500 1,650
Cut-off for fresh ore g/t 0.58 0.74 0.65
Cut-off for oxide ore g/t 0.43 0.49 0.55
Mineral Reserve parameters         
Mineral Reserve gold price US$/oz 1,300 1,300 1,500
Cut-off for fresh ore g/t 0.71 0.87 0.71
Cut-off for oxide ore g/t 0.52 0.59 0.60
Strip ratio waste:ore 4.26 4.67 6.51
Dilution (hydrothermal) % 17 – 20 6 – 25 6 – 20
Dilution (palaeoplacer) cm 40 40 40
Mine Call Factor (MCF) % 95 – 98 92 92
Plant recovery factor – fresh ore % 92 89 92
Plant recovery factor – oxide ore % 93.5 93.5 93.5
Processing capacity Mtpa 4.5 4.0 5.1

Grade Tonnage Curve 


Grade tonnage curve for the total open-pit Mineral Resource is
presented below: 

Grade tonnage curve for the open-pit Mineral Resource − Surface


150 3.0

120 2.5
Tonnes (millions)

2.0
urce − Surface 90
1.5
Grade (g/t)

3.0 60
1.0
2.5
30 0.5 Tonnes above cut-off
2.0
0 0.0 Average grade above cut-off
0.0 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2
1.5
Grade (g/t)

Cut-off grade (g/t)


1.0

0.5 Tonnes above cut-off

0.0 Average grade above cut-off


1.2

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 115

Damang Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves confidence levels of modifying factors lead to Measured


The Mineral Reserve estimate for Damang Gold Mine is based Mineral Resources converting to lower-confidence Probable
on development of appropriately detailed and engineered Mineral Reserves. The stockpiles included in the Mineral
LoM plans. All design and scheduling work is undertaken to Reserve comprise mostly lower-grade mineralisation that has
an appropriate level of detail by experienced engineers using been accumulated since the start of mining of the Damang
appropriate mine-planning software. The planning process pit. The stockpile material comprises about 8% of the Mineral
incorporates appropriate modifying factors and the use of Reserve ounces and 15% of the Mineral Reserve tonnes.
cut‑off grades and other techno-economic investigations. The key element underpinning the difference between the
Mineral Resource and the Mineral Reserve ounces is the
In general, Proved Mineral Reserves are derived from Measured exclusion of the DPCB 2 from the latter, accounting for 2.2Moz.
Mineral Resources, and the Probable Mineral Reserves are
derived from Indicated Mineral Resources, except where

Mineral Reserve classification 


  Tonnes (000 t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
       

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit and underground                  


Proved 1,732 1,067 8,731 1.55 1.61 1.81 86 55 509
Probable 20,096 18,373 64,813 1.62 1.58 1.68 1,046 932 3,507
Total open-pit and underground 21,827 19,440 73,544 1.61 1.58 1.70 1,132 987 4,016
Surface stockpiles                  
Proved                  
Probable 3,871 3,400 2,578 0.82 0.78 0.89 102 86 74
Total surface stockpiles 3,871 3,400 2,578 0.82 0.78 0.89 102 86 74
Grand total 25,699 22,840 76,122 1.49 1.46 1.67 1,235 1,073 4,090

Mineral Reserve classification per mining area 


  Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
       

  Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Mining area (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz)

Open-pit                  
Huni 785 1.44 36 4,718 1.21 183 5,503 1.24 219
Huni Saddle 518 1.87 31 7,598 1.95 476 8,116 1.94 507
DPCB 1 – – – 686 1.83 40 686 1.83 40
Juno 2 41 1.29 2 1,655 1.48 79 1,696 1.48 81
Juno 3 387 1.36 17 2,578 1.60 133 2,966 1.57 150
Lima South – – – 135 0.92 4 135 0.92 4
Amoanda – – – 889 1.89 54 889 1.89 54
Rex – – – 1,836 1.30 77 1,836 1.30 77
Total open-pit 1,732 1.55 86 20,096 1.62 1,046 21,827 1.61 1,132
Surface                  
Surface stockpiles – – – 3,871 0.82 102 3,871 0.82 102
Total surface stockpiles – – – 3,871 0.82 102 3,871 0.82 102
Grand total 1,732 1.55 86 23,967 1.49 1,148 25,699 1.49 1,235

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
116 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Factors that affected Mineral Factors that affected Mineral


Resource reconciliation year-on-year Reserve reconciliation year-on-year  
• Economic factors (increased mining unit cost, due to • The inclusion of additional ounces at Huni Cutback 2,
lower tonnes mined, impacting pit shell selection) Amoanda and DPCB 1
• Mined depletions • Mined depletions
• Mineral Resource modelling, notably the Huni ore body • Lower cut-off grades driven by lower selling and
modelling wireframes sustaining costs and better plant recoveries
• Marginal ore included positively accretive to NPV
• Increased Mine Call Factor (MCF)

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
7,000 6,579 1,400 82 1,235
6,000 1,200 238 27
(296) 16 16 5,260 1,073 (5)
5,000 (949) (106) 1,000 15
4,000 800 (195)
3,000 600
2,000 400
1,000 200
0 0
Mined
depletions

Economic
factors

Costs

Discovery

Resource
modelling

Inclusions/
Exclusions

Stockpile
movement

Dec 2013

Mined
depletions

Gold price

CoG

Exclusions

Inclusions

MCF

Marginal
ore

Other

Dec 2014
Dec 2014
Dec 2013

Mineral Reserve sensitivity Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold − koz)


The Mineral Reserve sensitivity has been derived from the 5,000

application of the relevant cut-off grades to individual grade 4,000

tonnage curves of the optimised pit shells for the open-pits. 3,000

2,000
The Mineral Reserve sensitivities (other than for the base case)
1,000
are not based on detailed depletion schedules and should be
0
considered on a relative and indicative basis only. The above (15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25%
graph indicates the Managed Mineral Reserve sensitivity at Base gold price (US$1,300/oz)
-15%, -10%, -5%, Base (US$1,300/oz), +5%, +10%, and +25%
to the gold price.

Competent Persons 
Internal technical reviews have been conducted by the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-time employees of
Gold Fields Limited. 

Richard Downing Michael Korsah Aidoo


Regional Mineral Resources Manager Mineral Resources Manager 
BSc (Hons) (Geology and Environment), GDE: Mining BSc (Hons) (Geology), MSc Mining Engineering,
Engineering, MAusIMM (No 229889). MAusIMM (No 306569).

Richard has 34 years’ experience in mining and exploration Michael has 14 years’ experience in mining, resource
in South Africa, Ireland and Ghana and is the lead Competent evaluation/modelling and exploration in Ghana and
Person for the West Africa region, jointly responsible for Asia (Laos) and is jointly responsible for the overall
the overall correctness, standard and compliance of this correctness, standard and compliance of this
declaration. declaration. 

Robert van der Westhuizen Emmanuel Addo


Regional Mine Planning Manager Unit Manager – Geostatistics and Resource
BSc (Hons) (Geology), MSc (Mining), MAusIMM (No 223783). Modelling
BSc (Hons) (Geological Engineering), MSc Geology,
Robert has 35 years’ experience in the mining industry MAusIMM (No 311729).
and is responsible for the overall correctness, standard
and compliance of the LoM planning, scheduling, reserve Emmanuel has 10 years’ experience in mining,
statement and economic assurance for Tarkwa and Damang. exploration and resource evaluation/modelling in
Ghana and Western Australia and is responsible for
the compilation of this declaration.  

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 117

Tarkwa Gold Mine 


www.goldfields.com

GENERAL LOCATION 

Tarkwa is located in south-western Ghana approximately 300 kilometres by road west of Accra, the capital, at latitude 5°15’N and
longitude 2°00’W. The Tarkwa Gold Mine is located four kilometres west of the town of Tarkwa with good access roads and an
established infrastructure. The mine is served by a main road connecting to the port of Takoradi some 60 kilometres to the south on
the Atlantic coast.

Asset fundamentals

The Tarkwa Mine operates under mining leases covering a total area of approximately
20,825 hectares. Five mining leases, dated 18 April 1997, cover the Tarkwa property, while two
mining leases, dated 2 February 1988 and 18 June 1992 respectively, cover the Teberebie property.
LICENCE STATUS The Tarkwa concession mining leases expire in 2027 and the Teberebie property mining leases expire
AND HOLDINGS in 2018. Application for an extension of the mining leases has been applied for and all required fees
and documentation submitted to the Minerals commission of Ghana. There is therefore no reason to
expect that these will not be granted. All necessary statutory mining authorisations and permits are in
place for the Tarkwa Mine Lease and GFG is entitled to mine all material falling within the lease.

Four large open pits currently exploit the stacked narrow auriferous conglomerates, similar to those
mined in the Witwatersrand Basin of South Africa.
OPERATIONAL Ore is processed utilising a conventional CIL plant, with a gyratory crusher feeding a SAG mill and
INFRASTRUCTURE, ball mill. Gold is recovered from solution by electro-winning and smelted in an induction furnace.
MINERAL PROCESSING Current plant capacity is 13.5Mtpa, with expansion to 15.5Mtpa under assessment in 2015.
AND TSF CAPACITY LoM tailings deposition requirements are catered for in the short term by final lift sequences at the
operating TSF 1, 2 and 3 facilities and in the medium term by TSF 5 (under EPA review) and longer
term by planned TSFs 4 and 6.

A tropical climate, characterised by two distinct rainy seasons from March to July and September
to November. Average annual rainfall near the site is 2,030 millimetres. Although there may be minor
CLIMATE
disruptions to operations during the wet season, there is no operating or long-term constraint on
production due to climate. 

The open-pit surface operation currently exploits the tabular auriferous conglomerates from four
DEPOSIT TYPE
open pits – Pepe-Mantraim, Teberebie, Akontansi and Kottraverchy.

LIFE-OF-MINE (LoM) It is estimated that the current Mineral Reserves will be depleted in 2031 (17 years).

Tarkwa retained its ISO 14001:2004 environmental management system and certification
ENVIRONMENTAL/ following an external audit during 2012. The mine also retained full compliance to the International
HEALTH AND SAFETY Cyanide Management Institute (ICMI) Cyanide Management code, as well as OHSAS 18001 in
October and June 2014 respectively.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
118 regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Brief history of Tarkwa   The North Heap leach operations ceased in Q1 2014 and the
CIL plant capacity was increased to 13.5Mtpa in 2014. Further
Sinking of the Abontiakoon vertical shaft was completed in
expansions being considered have the potential to increase the
1935 and a central mill with a capacity of 30ktpm was
capacity to 15.5Mtpa.
constructed in the following four years. Several small mining
companies operated the Abontiakoon concession, but in 1960 Key developments
all workings were abandoned and allowed to flood.
• Mineral Reserves increased by 3% net of depletion to
In 1961, production restarted under the State Gold Mining 7.5 million ounces
Corporation and in 1963 the Tarkwa mines were renamed • The mine continues to deliver world-class mining and
Tarkwa Goldfields Limited. The Apinto Shaft was sunk in the processing costs. Restructuring the mine to operate at lower
mid‑seventies. total mining volumes (90Mpta – 100Mtpa total mining) will
ensure operational flexibility and underpin targeted head
GFG signed a management contract with the Ghanaian grades to deliver 500koz – 550koz of gold per annum
government to operate the mine in 1993 and in 1996 completed • Due to the increasing hardness of the ore as the pits drive
a feasibility study on an open-pit/heap leach operation. In 1998, deeper and the resultant lower dissolution recoveries, the
the initial Tarkwa Phase I development was completed for an North Heap leach operation was stopped at the end of
open-pit operation mining 14.5Mtpa, including 4.7Mtpa of December 2013
heap leach feed ore. In 1999, the Tarkwa Phase II expansion • Various alternative mining and processing options have been
was completed to increase the mining rate to 20.7Mtpa and investigated to identify the best value option for Tarkwa.
heap leach feed ore production to 7.2Mtpa. All underground A Carbon in Leach (CIL) only option, proved to be the most
operations and the associated processing plant ceased operationally and financially viable choice, as it offers an
production in that year. In 2000, GFG acquired the northern area increased throughput rate to 13.5Mtpa from 2015 with
of Teberebie and mining production was pushed to 36Mtpa. processing of the spent south heap leach material at the end
of the production profile
Tarkwa implemented owner mining in July 2004 and
• The Mineral Reserve declared as at 31 December 2014
commissioned a CIL plant with a ‘name plate’ capacity
takes into account the above strategy, with the objective of
of  4.2Mtpa in October 2004. The expanded CIL plant
optimising Tarkwa’s Mineral Reserve, cash flow and NPV
was commissioned in January 2009 and a design throughput
of 12.3Mtpa was achieved in September 2009. Conversion to
owner maintenance was completed in 2010. 

In 2011, Gold Fields Ghana Limited acquired the 18.9%


IAMGold interest in Tarkwa and now holds 90%, with the
remaining 10% held by the Ghanaian government. During 2013,
the South Heap Leach operations ceased. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 119

160000E

170000E
N

90000N 90000N

National Road to
Kumasi/Bogoso/Prestea

Overlap Area
80000N National Railway 80000N
to Prestea

TSF 3 Abosso Deeps


Kottraverchy West
Waste Dump
Samahu
Kottraverchy East
Waste Dump Phase 5 Pad
Abosso Town
North Pad
Kottraverchy Pit

Kottraverchy South
East Waste Dump TSF 2 Bamboo Waste Dump
Papa Waste Dump
TSF 1
Pepe Pit
Mine Offices
CIL Plant Makulu Pit Damang has the right to area from surface to 30m below
North Primary Crusher Tarkwa has the right to area from below 30m
Akontansi Pit Mine Village
Atuabo Pit
Akontansi Atuabo Waste Dump
Waste Dump
Bridge Waste Dump Airstrip Waste Dump
Python Neck Waste Dump
West Hill Waste Dump
70000N Merve Waste Dump 70000N
Blue Ridge Pad
West Pad Ext.
West Pad
Tarkwa Town

Teberebie/Mantraim Pit
Retread Factory
South Pad
South Primary
Crusher

PLAN SHOWING TARKWA MINE INFRASTRUCTURE AS AT 31 DECEMBER 2014

0 1 2 3 4 5

Kilometres
Ghana National Grid Co-ordinate System
170000E
160000E

Reference
Pipe Line Waste Dumps
National Road Open-pit
National Railway Tailings/Pad
Mining Lease Exploration Drilling Sites

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
120 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Operating statistics  
  Historic performance
           

  Units C2014 C2013 C2012 C2011

Open-pit mining           
Total mined kt 87,343 137,449 138,237 114,461
– Waste mined kt 73,719 118,379 116,330 94,927
– Ore mined kt 13,625 19,070 22,647 21,095
Mined grade g/t 1.31 1.25 1.25 1.23
Strip ratio (tonnes) waste:ore 5.4 6.2 5.3 4.4
Processing          
Combined          
Tonnes treated kt 13,553 19,268 22,910 23,138
Head grade g/t 1.26 1.16 1.08 1.05
Yield g/t 1.23 1.02 0.98 0.96
Plant recovery factor % 97.3 90.3 90.2 92
Total gold production koz 558 632 719 717
CIL          
Tonnes milled kt 13,361 11,823 11,600 11,426
CIL: head grade   1.22 1.39 1.44 1.48
koz 527 513 540 518
– Yield ex-mill
g/t 1.23 1.35 1.40 1.41
CIL: PRF % 97.3 97,5 97.0 97.0
Heap leach          
Tonnes to heap leach kt 192 7,445 11,310 11,713
Heap leach: head grade   0.76 0.81 0.85 0.88
koz 31 119 179 199
– Yield ex-heap leach
g/t 0.50 0.49 0.55
Heap leach: RF % n/a 60 61 61
Financials          
Average Au price received US$/oz 1,266 1,413 1,668 1,565
Operating cost US$/oz 670 749 688 608
Capital expenditure US$/oz 312 327 361 305
All-in Sustaining Cost (AISC) US$/oz 1,068 1,291    
Mineral Reserves          
Mineral Reserves Mt 222.4 218.8 293.3 264.8
Mineral Reserves head grade g/t 1.051 1.03 1.07 1.2
Mineral Reserves Moz 7.49 7.27 10.1 10.3
Rounding-off of figures presented in this report may result in minor computational discrepancies. Where this occurs it is not deemed significant.
1
  Open-pit LoM Grade = 1.30glt, excluding surface stockpiles.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 121

Tarkwa Gold Mine (continued)

Local geology Mining


The local geology at Tarkwa is dominated by the banket series, Tarkwa is a large, highly efficient open-pit gold mine with world-
which can be further subdivided into a footwall and hangingwall class productivities and operating costs. It utilises well-defined
barren quartzite, separated by a sequence of mineralised selective surface mining methods to optimise the extraction of
conglomerates and pebbly quartzites. the sedimentary mineral deposits.

The stratigraphy of the individual quartzite units is well The mine is owner-operated and has its own load and haul fleet
established, with auriferous reefs interbedded with including 16 excavators, which range from 120 to 400 tonnes.
barren immature quartzites. The units thicken to the west and The haul fleet includes 48 dump trucks with a payload of 146
current sedimentological parameters indicate a flow from the tonnes, 8 dump trucks with a payload of 240 tonnes and 9 dump
east and north-east. Structurally, the Tarkwaian belt has been trucks with a payload of 90 tonnes. The load and haul fleet is
subject to moderate folding, and at least five episodes of supported by an ancillary fleet consisting of dozers, graders,
deformation are recognised. The original deposition occurred in water carts and compactors. A total of 22 owner-operated drill
a district basin environment with associated low to steep-angle rigs are used for blast hole drilling. Maintenance of the fleet is
normal faulting. Subsequent compression and folding led to the carried out by Gold Fields Ghana Limited, while maintenance
development of thrust faults and inversion of previous normal of the excavators is carried out by contractors. In 2015, Tarkwa
faults. The final stages involved further thrusting in a south- plans to mine an approximate total of 90 million tonnes of
westerly direction. material at a stripping ratio of  6.2 against a LoM strip ratio of 5.4.

Sedimentological studies of the detailed stratigraphy within Mining methods


individual footwall reef units have led to the recognition of Tarkwa utilises a proven and highly selective mining
both lateral and vertical facies variations. The modelling of methodology that optimises ore recovery and minimises dilution.
these has resulted in the recognition of a cycle of events from The location of the mining areas is defined through the long-
initial channel formation and rapid down-cutting of the central term planning process. The boundaries of the pits are pegged
channel, through a period of uplift and reworking. Finally, out by survey and the area is cleared of bush and topsoil,
a period of meandering channel bars and flow reduction which is relocated for rehabilitation purposes. After clearing,
led to the development of low-grade conglomerates with reverse circulation (RC) grade control drilling is carried out and
silty interbeds. The period of uplift and reworking has been geological models updated. This grade control information is
recognised as being the principal episode of gold deposition used to inform the short-term plans and forecasts prior to the
and concentration within these reefs. The style of sedimentation commencement of mining. Currently, fresh rock and transitional
ranges from channelised and incised reefs to more localised zones are drilled and blasted in six-metre benches, with
sheet-flood-dominated alluvial fan deposits. excavation in three-metre flitches.

Exploration and resource definition drilling Backhoe excavators are used to select waste from the ore,
The bulk of the Tarkwa open-pit palaeoplacer Mineral Resource and vice versa. This takes place along the sedimentary horizons
has been drilled and classified into the Measured and Indicated to an average accuracy of 30cm on the hangingwall, and 20cm
Mineral Resource categories at current costs and a gold price of on the footwall of a reef. Pit geologists and geo-technicians
US$1,500/oz. Tarkwa is now a well-established and understood supervise all digging and mineralised material is classified
mine, with the value-driven strategy focussed on optimising the as either Run of Mine (RoM), which is delivered to one of two
pit staging, mining mix and processing throughput rates. primary crushers, or low-grade material, which is stockpiled
close to the primary crushers. Waste material is hauled to the
A reconnaissance soil sampling programme was initiated in nearest waste dump.
September 2014, on a 400m X 100m grid pattern over the lease
area. Previously less understood areas on the concession
were targeted for exploration activities to assess the potential
for the area. The initial programme was completed at the end
of December, and follow up soil sampling, trenching and infill-
drilling will be conducted over the resulting prioritised anomalies,
notably those of hydrothermal style, during 2015. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
122 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Mine planning and scheduling Projects


The planning cycle commences with the ratification of
Business improvement remains 'business as usual' and
key input parameters, before producing a compliant and
together with the priority placed on health and safety, the key
updated Mineral Resource statement that is adjusted for
areas of production, quality and cash generation continue to
all Mineral Resource depletions. This is followed by the
receive focus. Optimisation of the crushing rate and stockpile
planning process, which includes all technical inputs
management, improved blast fragmentation and leveraging the
such as geotechnical, hydrogeological and detailed pit
shared services strategy are targeted areas.
engineering and accommodates all modifying factors and
the inclusion of relevant corporate metrics on macro-economic The major LoM project in 2015 is a study to assess the
parameters. The development of a one-year operational plan opportunity to expand the CIL plant to a potential 15.5Mtpa
follows and is rolled-out into a LoM plan, which forms the basis capacity, to be fed with either the old North Heap Leach material
of Tarkwa’s annual Mineral Reserve declaration. or newly mined material from the pits. Additional projects that
will continue to receive focus in 2015, will be the evaluation
A cut-off grade strategy is used in the Mineral Reserve
of alternative waste dumping and tailings disposal strategies,
estimation process whereby the cut-off defines the ore/waste
including in-pit dumping, energy and carbon-efficiency
segregation. The optimal cut-off/cut-over is also derived and can
initiatives. 
be applied to increase the grade and therefore the cash
flow in the initial years of the LoM plan. Material between the
optimal cut-off/cut-over and the metallurgical process cut-off is
stockpiled for treatment at the end of the LoM.

A detailed one-year operating and capital cost budget is


developed for all operational plans and, where appropriate,
extended for the LoM production schedule. Zero-based costing
is used to formulate the one-year plan. Historic productivity
data and operating costs are utilised as the basis from which
the operational budget is benchmarked. All capital projects are
ranked and prioritised to maximise capital efficiency and return
on investment. Importantly, maintenance of the capital waste
strip to secure a steady flow of high-grade ore to deliver ongoing
mining flexibility is strictly monitored.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 123

Tarkwa Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves has shown that this is realistically achievable when reclaiming
a stockpile. RoM stockpile tonnages were reconciled to survey
The Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves have been
volumes in December 2014. Unless otherwise stated, all Mineral
updated using the current Gold Fields planning gold price
Resources and Mineral Reserves are quoted as 100% managed
of US$1,500/oz and US$1,300/oz respectively and reported
and are not attributable with respect to ownership.
in accordance with SAMREC Code. The year-on-year Mineral
Resources and Mineral Reserves have changed by -7% Mineral Resources 
and +3% net of depletion respectively and the changes are
Mineral Resources are quoted at an appropriate in situ economic
discussed in the reconciliation section.
cut-off grade, within pit shell models with tonnages and grades
based on the Mineral Resource block model. They also include
Stockpile tonnage and grade estimates are based on
estimates of any material below the cut-off grade that is required
accumulations of estimated tonnage and grades trucked
to be mined in order to extract the complete pay portion of the
throughout the history of the mine, and are therefore considered
Mineral Resource.
to be reasonably accurate. However, the grades and tonnages
are discounted by 5% for processing purposes as experience

Mineral Resource classification 


Tonnes (Mt) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
     

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit and underground                  


Measured 81.6 99.6 113.0 1.48 1.48 1.46 3,880 4,731 5,292
Indicated 109.1 109.0 142.0 1.34 1.31 1.24 4,688 4,592 5,665
Inferred 3.1 2.9 30.1 1.13 1.07 2.92 111 101 2,825
Total open-pit and underground 193.7 211.5 285.1 1.39 1.39 1.50 8,679 9,425 13,782
Surface stockpiles                  
Indicated (South Heap Leach) 60.0 60.0 56.0 0.40 0.40 0.38 771 771 684
Measured (stockpiles) 5.0 4.2 4.1 0.73 0.70 0.74 118 95 97
Total surface stockpiles 65.0 64.2 60.1 0.43 0.42 0.40 889 866 781
Grand total 258.7 275.7 345.2 1.15 1.16 1.31 9,568 10,291 14,563

Mineral Resource classification per mining area 


Measured Indicated Inferred Total Mineral Resource
       

  Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold
Open-pit (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz) (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz) (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz) (Mt) (g/t) (000 oz)

Akontansi 24.3 1.31 1,023 79.2 1.27 3,241 2.1 0.97 67 105.6 1.28 4,331
Kottraverchy 9.1 1.68 493 0.0 0.96 0 0.0 0.00 0 9.1 1.68 493
Pepe/Mantraim 15.5 1.50 745 9.1 1.27 372 0.7 1.52 36 25.3 1.42 1,153
Teberebie 32.7 1.54  1,619  20.9 1.60 1,075 0.2 1.42 8 53.8 1.56 2,702
Total open-pit 81.6 1.48 3,880 109.1 1.34 4,688 3.1 1.13 111 193.7 1.39 8,679
Surface                        
Spent Ore (South
Heap Leach) – – – 60.0 0.40 771 – – – 60.0 0.40 771
Surface stockpiles  5.0 0.73 118 – – – – – – 5.0 0.73 118
Total surface 5.0 0.73 118 60.0 0.40 771       65.0 0.43 889
Grand total 86.6 1.44 3,997 169.1 1.00 5,459 3.1 1.13 111 258.7 1.15 9,568

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
124 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Modifying factors
• The Measured and Indicated Mineral Resources are inclusive of those Mineral Resources modified to produce Mineral Reserves
• All Mineral Reserves are quoted in terms of RoM grades and tonnages as delivered to the metallurgical processing facilities and are
therefore fully diluted
• Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves undergo regular internal and/or external audits, and any issues identified are rectified at
the earliest opportunity  

    Units December 2014 December 2013 December 2012

Mineral Resource parameters        


Mineral Resource gold price  US$/oz 1,500 1,500 1,650
Cut-off for mill feed g/t 0.40 0.46 0.39
Mineral Reserve parameters        
Mineral Reserve gold price US$/oz 1,300 1,300 1,500
Cut-off for mill feed g/t 0.48 0.52 0.42
Mining recovery factor (open-pit) % 100 100 100
Strip ratio (waste: ore) ratio 5.6 5.1 6.1
MCF  % 100 100 100
Dilution open-pit1 cm 30/20 30/20 30/20
Plant recovery factor – CIL % 97.2 97 97
CIL processing capacity2 Mtpa 13.5 12.3 12.3
1
Refers to 30cm hangingwall and 20cm footwall dilution respectively.
2
CIL capacity is planned to increase to 13.5Mtpa from 2015.

Grade Tonnage Curve


Grade tonnage curve for the total open-pit Mineral Resource is
presented below:

Grade tonnage curve for the open-pit Mineral Resource − Surface


300 3.0

250 2.5

200 2.0
Tonnes (millions)

Grade (g/t)

150 1.5

100 1.0

50 0.5 Tonnes above cut-off


Average grade above cut-off
0 0.0
0 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8

Cut-off grade (g/t)

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 125

Tarkwa Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserves Mineral Reserve statements include only Measured and


The Mineral Reserve estimate for Tarkwa Gold Mine is based Indicated Mineral Resources modified to produce Mineral
on the development of appropriately detailed and engineered Reserves contained in the LoM plan. This declaration is based
LoM plans. All design and scheduling work is undertaken to on the premise that all the ore will be treated through the
an applicable level of detail by experienced engineers using CIL plant.
mine-planning software. The planning process incorporates
appropriate modifying factors and the use of cut-off grades
and other techno-economic investigations.

Mineral Reserve classification 


  Tonnes (000 t) Grade (g/t) Gold (000 oz)
     

Classification Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12 Dec 14 Dec 13 Dec 12

Open-pit                  
Proved 77,681 82,700 103,874 1.35 1.30 1.29 3,364 3,466 4,305
Probable 79,720 71,900 129,300 1.26 1.27 1.20 3,237 2,941 4,996
Total open-pit 157,401 154,600 233,174 1.30 1.29 1.24 6,601 6,407 9,300
Surface stockpiles                  
Proved 5,015 4,231 4,098 0.73 0.70 0.74 118 95 97
Probable South Heap Leach 59,977 59,977 56,000 0.40 0.40 0.38 771 771 684
Total surface stockpiles 64,992 64,208 60,098 0.43 0.42 0.40 889 866 781
Grand total 222,393 218,808 293,272 1.05 1.03 1.07 7,491 7,273 10,081

Mineral Reserve classification per mining area 


  Proved Probable Total Mineral Reserve
                   

  Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold Tonnes Grade Gold


Area (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz) (kt) (g/t) (koz)

Open-pit                  
Akontansi 25,938 1.22 1,015 56,341 1.20 2,172 82,280 1.20 3,187
Kottraverchy 5,995 1.45 280 1 0.57 0 5,996 1.45 280
Pepe/Mantraim 13,750 1.40 619 2,432 1.10 86 16,182 1.36 705
Teberebie 31,997 1.41 1,451 20,946 1.45 978 52,943 1.43 2,429
Total open-pit 77,681 1.35 3,364 79,720 1.26 3,237 157,401 1.30 6,601
Spent ore (South Heap Leach) – – – 59,977 0.40 771 59,977 0.40 771
Surface stockpiles 5,015 0.73 118 – – – 5,015 0.73 118
Grand total 82,697 1.31 3,482 139,697 0.89 4,008 222,393 1.05 7,491

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
126 Regions, operations and projects

2.4 West Africa region (continued)

Factors that affected Mineral Factors that affected Mineral


Resource reconciliation year-on-year  Reserve reconciliation year-on-year
• Depletion by mining • Depletion by mining
• An increase in mining cost inputs from US$2.41/tonne to • Improvements from Resource model updates and revised
US$2.75/tonne mined pit designs
• Changes in Resource model wire frames based on new • Inclusion of the Teberebie pillar and mining synergies
grade control drilling • Decrease in cut-off grades due to lower electricity costs
• Inclusion of the Teberebie pillar • Changes due to improved mine designs

Mineral Resource Reconciliation (Gold − koz) Mineral Reserve Reconciliation (Gold − koz)
12,000 8,000 7,273 238 312 119 7,491
10,291 113
10,000 408 49 9,568 7,000
(564) 6,000 (564)
8,000 (617)
5,000
6,000 4,000
4,000 3,000
2 000
2,000 1,000
0 0

Model
changes
Mined
depletions

Economic
factors

Exclusions

Pillar
inclusions

Resource
modelling

Other

Dec 2013

Mined
depletions

Pit design/
Schedule

Pillar
inclusion

Gold price

CoG

Other

Dec 2014
Dec 2014
Dec 2013

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 127

Tarkwa Gold Mine (continued)

Mineral Reserve sensitivity


The Mineral Reserve sensitivity has been derived from the
Competent Persons
application of the relevant cut-off grades to individual grade Internal technical reviews have been conducted by the
tonnage curves of the optimised pit shells for the open pits. Competent Persons as listed, who are full-time employees
of Gold Fields Limited.
The Mineral Reserve sensitivities (other than for the base case)
are not based on detailed depletion schedules and should be Godfred Baba Avane
considered on a relative and indicative basis only. The following Mineral Resources Manager
graph indicates the Managed Mineral Reserve sensitivity at MSc (Geological Engineering); MAusIMM  (No 309400). 
-15%, -10%, -5%, Base (US$1,300/oz), +5%, +10%, and +25%
Godfred has over 19 years’ experience in the mining
to the gold price. industry and is the lead Competent Person, responsible
for overall Mineral Resource Management for Tarkwa.
Mineral Reserve Sensitivity (Gold − Moz) Robert van der Westhuizen
10.0
9.0
Regional Mine Planning Manager
8.0 BSc (Hons) (Geology); MSc (Mining);
7.0
6.0 MAusIMM (No 223783).
5.0
4.0
3.0 Robert has 35 years’ experience in the mining industry
2.0 and is responsible for the overall correctness, standard
1.0
0 and compliance of the LoM planning, scheduling, reserve
(15%) (10%) (5%) Base 5% 10% 15% 25% statement and economic assurance for Tarkwa and
Base gold price (US$1,300/oz) Damang.

John Searra
Chief Resource Geologist
BSc (Hons) (Geology); MSc (Engineering).

John has over 29 years’ experience in the mining industry


and is responsible for sampling, geology, exploration and
resource estimation for Tarkwa. 

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
2.5 Corporate Development –
Arctic Platinum Project (APP)
100% attributable to GFI

LOCATION

APP consists of three project areas named Suhanko, Narkaus and Arctic Platinum Project
Penikat. The projects are located in southern Lapland, centred Finland
approximately 50km south of the city of Rovaniemi, which is
the regional capital with excellent infrastructure and services.
A network of well-established roads exist in the area with all year Mineral Resources of 208,5Mt for 9.8Moz
access to the port of  Kemi. Finland is a mining-friendly jurisdiction palladium, 2.4Moz platinum and 786koz gold with
with a skilled workforce and favourable tax regime. 1,034Mlb copper and 438Mlb nickel

Project ownership Project geology


The Suhanko deposits are magmato-hydrothermal zones
APP consists of three valid mining licences, 95 valid exploration
of  stratiform PGE-Cu-Ni mineralisation at the base of
claims and one valid reservation licence, with a number of
the Konttijärvi-Suhanko intrusion. The zones range from 10m
renewal applications in progress. The lease holder is Gold
to 60m in thickness and are laterally continuous for 900m
Fields Arctic Platinum Oy (GFAP), which is a subsidiary of Gold
to 2,600m. The platinum group minerals occur in association with
Fields Finland Oy. Both companies are 100% owned indirect
base metal sulphides chalcopyrite > pyrrhotite > pentlandite.
subsidiaries of  Gold Fields Limited.
Analogous deposits are the Platreef of the Bushveld complex
There has been no commercial mining of these (South Africa), the Roby Zone at Lac des Isles Thunder Bay
deposits. The locations were originally explored by (Canada), and Federova in the Kola Peninsula (Russia).
Outokumpu Oy up to January 2000, which was the start of
PGE mineralisation at Narkaus and Penikat occurs as reef-type
the Arctic Platinum Partnership agreement between Gold
deposits, which subcrop beneath glacial till on ground held by
Fields and Outokumpu. Gold Fields was the operator and in
GFAP for 11km at Narkaus and 21km at Penikat. The reefs are
2003 acquired 100% of the partnership and registered GFAP
developed along the contact between gabbroic footwall rocks
as the operating company in Finland. From 2005 to 2008, GFAP
and overlying ultramafic pyroxenite and peridotite stratigraphic
entered into an Acquisition and Framework Agreement with
units. Offset-style copper-rich mineralisation also occurs at
North American Palladium Limited (NAP) and this option
Narkaus in granites of the Archaean Basement with the best
agreement expired in 2008, when NAP elected not to follow its
developed example being the Kilvenjarvi deposit.
rights. GFAP assumed full management and control of GFAP
from 1 September 2008.
Exploration process, sampling and QA/QC
Regional geology All exploration and resource definition drilling has been
by diamond core drilling, with logging and sampling undertaken
The Suhanko and Narkaus deposits are hosted by the 2.44Ga
by GFAP employees under supervision of an experienced
old layered mafic intrusive rocks of the Portimo complex. All the
Finnish management team. Assaying for Pt, Pd and Au was
intrusive rocks, including the Penikat intrusion, are intrusive into
completed by fire assay with Pb collection and ICP-ES finish.
the Archaean Basement and are exposed along or close to the
Base metals and sulphur were analysed by aqua regia digest
erosional contact with the overlying Proterozoic schist belt.
followed by an ICP-ES finish. Routine QA/QC procedures have

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Regions, operations and projects 129

been adopted throughout with external audit of the exploration


procedures, assay database and geological modelling. 
     

Year DD holes DD metres


     

     

1981 – 1999 Outokumpu 73,294


2000 – 2005 GFAP 205,790
2006 – 2008 NAP 43,437
2008 – 2014 GFAP 135,087
FINLAND
Total metres   457,608
The table above lists the drilling metres completed by different companies during
respective periods.
NAP – North American Palladium. 
Rovaniemi
Level of study, proposed mining and processing
methodology
APP
At Suhanko, GFAP completed a positive prefeasibility study on
the Konttijärvi, Ahmavaara and Suhanko North deposits at the
end of 2012. The study evaluated a 10Mtpa open-pit mining
operation followed by sulphide flotation to produce a bulk
concentrate. Recovery of metals from the concentrate would
be on-site by pressure oxidation and the hydrometallurgical
Arctic Platinum Project – Mineral Resources
process Platsol® with chloride leaching to produce a PGE + Au            

precipitate, LME-grade copper and a mixed NiCo-hydroxide. Total Metal


– (Measured
Geological modelling and scoping-level open-pit optimisation
Indicated &
studies have been completed for the SK Reef  deposits and the
Inferred*) Gold Platinum Palladium Copper Nickel
Kilvenjärvi offset at Narkaus. No open-pit or underground mining            

studies have been completed at Penikat for the reef-style deposits.            

Tonnes (Mt) 208.5 208.5 208.5 208.5 208.5


Extensive metallurgical sampling programmes have been g/t g/t g/t % %
Grade
completed at Suhanko. A pilot plant flotation and Platsol® metal 0.12 0.36 1.47 0.22 0.10
recovery study was completed for the 2012 prefeasibility study. Total – koz koz koz Mlb Mlb
content 786 2,417 9,842 1,034 438
Social licence to operate *The Inferred category constitutes 45% of the total Mineral Resource.
No change year-on-year in declaration.
APP completed the Suhanko EIA processes which were
initiated in 2011 in order to expand the project footprint, and
to provide for significant increases in total material mined and
implementation of the Platsol® metal recovery process. The
Competent Persons 
Michael Botha
permitting authority approved the EIA for the expanded project
(MAusIMM 226388), who holds the position of VP Strategic
on 10 March 2014 and the associated Natura 2000 assessment
Projects, is the principal Competent Person for this
on 19 May 2014, while the EIA for the 220kV power line was disclosure.
approved on 27 February 2014. The local regional authority
formally approved the regional land use plan for the expanded Michael has been actively involved in the exploration and
development of the Arctic Platinum Project since start of
Suhanko project area on 25 May 2014 after which it was
exploration in 2000.
referred to the Ministry of Environment for final ratification. From
earlier phases of project permitting a valid Environmental and Alex Trueman
Water Management permit is in place for the Suhanko Mining (PGeo, APEGBC 149753 and MAusIMM CP 110730)
Licence, which allows for open-pit mining of the Konttijärvi and
Chief  Resource Geologist of Gold Fields Exploration, Inc.
Ahmavaara deposits and the flotation concentration of their ores
is responsible for Mineral Resource Estimates.   
on site. 

Mineral Resources
No new exploration, geological modelling or metallurgical
testing was completed during 2014 that would change
the estimation input parameters. As a result there are
no changes to the Mineral Resources from the previous year.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Corporate governance (Reporting code and codes of practice) 132
3
information

Competent Persons 133

Conversion table 133

Abbreviations 134

Glossary of  terms 135


132 Supplementary information

Corporate governance (reporting code and


code of practice) 
This Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report outlines the submissions. However, certain terms referring to Mineral
declared Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves at each of Resources are used in this report, such as ‘Measured, Indicated
Gold Fields’ business regions, including individual operating and Inferred Mineral Resources’. Consequently, US investors are
mines, as well as its growth projects and primary exploration urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F.
targets, as at 31 December 2014.
This statement further compares to the previous public
The Group’s December 2014 Mineral Resource and Mineral declaration made in the Gold Fields Integrated Annual Review
Reserve statement is in accordance with the requirements for 2013 dated 31 December 2013 and therefore encompasses
of the South African Code for the Reporting of Exploration a 12-month mined depletion period. The December 2014
Results, Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves (the SAMREC declaration aims to report on Mineral Resources and Mineral
Code, 2007 edition), the South African Code for the Reporting Reserves information that is rated as important for disclosure
of Mineral Asset Valuation (2009 SAMVAL Code) and Industry and it reflects a level of detail required for completeness,
Guide 7 for reporting on the United States Securities and transparency and materiality in reporting. Gold Fields Mineral
Exchange Commission (SEC). Notice is taken of other relevant Resources and Mineral Reserves are reviewed and audited on
international codes, where geographically applicable, such as an ongoing basis by internal and external Competent Persons,
the Australian JORC Code 2012 and the Canadian National with formal audits conducted on all operations and projects,
Instrument (NI) 43-101. as follows:

The SEC permits mining companies, in their filings with the • Ongoing technical review;
commission, to disclose only those Mineral Reserves that a • Annual executive regional review;
company can economically and legally extract or produce. • Regular external and internal reviews; and
In accordance with the SEC guidelines, companies are not • Annual Group executive review.
permitted to report Mineral Resources in their Form 20-F

Prepared by Competent Persons (CPs) who are full-time employees of Gold Fields Limited in compliance with the
South African Code for the Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves
(2007 SAMREC Code)

Effective date 31 December 2014

Source of information This Supplement is a summary of the respective Operation’s December 2014 Competent Persons
Reports (CPR)

Personal inspection Personal inspection is conducted by the Competent Persons as listed, who are full-time employees of
Gold Fields Limited

Independent review Information reported in this declaration is as reviewed by internal consultants as at 31 December 2014.
The review identified no material shortcomings in any process by which the Mineral Resources and
Mineral Reserves were evaluated. The procedure followed in producing the declaration is aligned to the
guiding principles of the Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX) Act of 2002.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Supplementary information 133

Competent Persons
The Competent Persons (CPs) designated in terms of SAMREC the overall regulatory compliance of these figures has been
who take responsibility for the reporting of Gold Fields overseen and consolidated by the Gold Fields Competent
Mineral Resources and Mineral Reserves are the respective Person, Tim Rowland, who consents to the disclosure of this
operation-based Mineral Resource Managers and relevant Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve statement. Corporate
Project Managers, as listed in the respective sections. The Governance on the overall compliance of these figures and
Competent Persons have sufficient experience relative to the responsibility for the generation of a consolidated statement
type and style of mineral deposit under consideration and are has been overseen by the respective corporate and regional
full-time employees of Gold Fields. Corporate governance on Competent Persons listed below:

       

Competent Person Title Qualifications Years


       

       

Tim Rowland1, 4  Vice-President: BSc (Hons) Geology; MSc Mineral Exploration; 29


Number 400122/00 Group Mineral Resource Management and GDE Mining Engineering; Pr Sci Nat, FSAIMM,
Mine Planning FGSSA; GASA

Winfred Assibey-Bonsu1  Group Geostatistician and Evaluator BSc (Mining); PhD (Eng); EDP Wits Business 29
Number 400112/00 School

Heinrich Schnetler2  Manager: MRM NHD (Mine Survey); GDE (Mining Engineering); 39
PMS 0105 MSCC

Shaun Hackett3  Principal Resource Geologist BAppSc Geology, Citation Applied Geostatistics 24
MAusIMM (211644)

Alex Trueman3 Chief Resource Geologist Americas region  BSc (Hons); Geology 23
MAusIMM 110730
1
Registered SACNASP members 
2
Registered PLATO members
3
Registered AusIMM members
4
Registered SAIMM members
5
Registered ROPO members 

Conversion table
The following conversion factors are applicable:
       

Metric Imperial Imperial Metric


       

       

1 centimetre 0.3937 inches 1 inch 2.54 centimetres


1 metre 3.28084 feet 1 foot 0.3047972654 metres
1 kilometre 0.62150 miles 1 mile 1.609 kilometres
1 gram 0.03215 troy ounces 1 troy ounce 31.1034768 grams
1 gram/tonne 0.0292 ounce/tonne 1 ounce/tonne 34.28 grams/tonne
1 kilogram 2.20458 pounds 1 pound 0.4536 kilograms
1 tonne 1.10229 short tonnes 1 short tonne 0.9072 tonnes
1 hectare 2.47097 acres 1 acre 0.4047 hectares

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
134 Supplementary information

Abbreviations
ADR adsorption recovery carbon plant LIB Long-inclined borehole
Ag silver LME London Metal Exchange
AGC Advance Grade Control LoM Life-of-Mine
AGL Abosso Goldfields Limited m metre
AIC All-in Cost m 2
square metre
AISC All-in Sustaining Cost MCF Mine Call Factor
APP Arctic Platinum Project m3/s cubic metres per second
ASM Artisanal Mining Mlb million pounds
A$ Australian Dollar Mo molybdenum
A$/oz Australian Dollar per ounce Moz million ounces
Au gold mRL metres relative level
BCM bulk cubic metres Mt million tonnes
CIL Carbon in Leach Mtpa million tonnes per annum
CIP Carbon in Pulp MW megawatt
cm centimetres NCE notional cash expenditure
cm.g/t centimetre grams per tonne Ni nickel
CO2 carbon dioxide NPV net present value
CP Competent Person NSR net smelter return
Cu copper oz ounces (troy)
COG cut-off grade Pd palladium
CW channel width PGE Platinum Group Elements
DD diamond drill 2 PGE platinum and palladium
3D three dimensional PL Prospecting Lease
DMR Department of Mineral Resources PRF Plant Recovery Factor
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment Pt platinum
EMP Environmental Management Plan RC reverse circulation hole
EPA Environmental Protection Agency R&D Research and Development
FCF Free Cash Flow RoM Run of Mine
GFG Gold Fields Ghana SAG Semi Autogenous Grind
GFI Gold Fields Ltd SAM Sub audio magnetics
g grams SAMREC South African Mineral Resource Committee
g/t grams per tonne SAMVAL South African Mineral Asset Valuation
Ga billion years SEC The United States Securities and Exchange Commission
GC grade control SOX Sarbanes-Oxley Act
GTC Grade Tonnage Curve SV sub-vertical
ha hectare SRD surface rock dump
HL Heap Leach SW stoping width
HME heavy mining equipment t metric tonne
HPGR high pressure grinding roll tpd tonne per day
ICP-ES Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy tph tonne per hour
ILR In-line leach reactor tpm tonne per month
JORC Australian Code for Reporting Exploration Results, TSF Tailings Storage Facility
Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves VCR Ventersdorp Contact Reef
JSE Johannesburg Securities Exchange U3O8 uranium oxide
kg kilogram US$ United States Dollar
kg/t kilograms per tonne US$/oz American Dollar per ounce
km kilometre WAPL Western Areas Prospecting Limited
ktpa thousand tonnes per annum WSF Waste Storage Facility
koz thousand ounces YoY year-on-year
LDIFR Lost Day Injury Frequency Rate ZAR South African Rand

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Supplementary information 135

Glossary of terms
block width The average width at which it is estimated a block of ore will be mined.

clastic Pertaining to a rock or sediment composed principally of broken fragments that are derived
from pre-existing rocks or minerals by the processes of weathering and erosion, and have been
transported some distance from their place of origin.

cut-off grade The lowest grade of mineralised rock which determines as to whether or not it is economic to
recover its gold content by further concentration.

dilution Waste or material below the cut-off grade that contaminates the ore during the process of mining
operations and thereby reduces the average grade mined.

destress By mining a 2-metre slice through the package in an optimal position to ensure a destressed window
of 50 to 60 metres above or below the associated stope.

Gold Equivalent Ounces A quantity of metal (such as copper) converted to an amount of gold in ounces, based on accepted
gold and other metal prices, i.e. the accepted total value of the metal based on its weight and value
thereof divided by the accepted value of one troy ounce of gold.

Indicated Mineral Resource That part of a Mineral Resource for which tonnage, densities, shape, physical characteristics,
grade and mineral content can be estimated with a reasonable level of confidence. It is based on
information from exploration, sampling and testing of material gathered from locations such as
outcrops, trenches, pits, workings and drill holes. The locations are too widely or inappropriately
spaced to confirm geological and/or grade continuity but are spaced closely enough for continuity
to be assumed.

Inferred Mineral Resource That part of a Mineral Resource for which tonnage, grade and mineral content can be estimated with
a low level of confidence. It is inferred from geological evidence and sampling and assumed but
not verified geologically or through analysis of grade continuity. It is based on information gathered
through appropriate techniques from locations such as outcrops, trenches, pits, workings and drill
holes that may be limited or of uncertain quality and reliability.

Intracratonic basin Refers to a basin on top of a craton, which is part of the earth’s crust that has attained stability and
has been little deformed for a prolonged period.

Kriging Efficiency (KE) Provides a measure of the reliability of block evaluations.

lacustrine Produced by or formed within a lake or lake environment.

Life-of-Mine (LoM) Number of years that an operation is planning to mine and treat ore, based on the current mining plan.

littoral Pertaining to the zone between the highest and lowest levels of spring tides known as the fore-beach.

Measured Mineral Resource That part of a Mineral Resource for which tonnage, densities, shape, physical characteristics,
grade and mineral content can be estimated with a high level of confidence. It is based on detailed
and reliable information from exploration, sampling and testing of material from locations such
as outcrops, trenches, pits, workings and drill holes. The locations are spaced closely enough to
confirm geological and grade continuity.

Mine Call Factor The ratio expressed as a percentage which the specific product accounted for in ‘recovery plus
residue’ bears to the corresponding product ‘called for’ by the mine’s measuring and evaluation
methods.

Mineral Reserve (Reserve)  The economically mineable material derived from a Measured and/or Indicated Mineral Resource.
It is inclusive of diluting and contaminating materials and allows for losses that are expected to
occur when the material is mined. Appropriate assessments to a minimum of a Prefeasibility Study
for a project and an LoM plan for an operation must have been completed, including consideration
of and modification by, realistically assumed mining, metallurgical, economic, marketing, legal,
environmental, social and governmental factors (the modifying factors). Such modifying factors must
be disclosed.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
136 Supplementary information

Glossary of terms (continued)

Mineral Resource (Resource) A concentration or occurrence of material of economic interest in or on the earth’s crust in such
form, quality and quantity that there are reasonable and realistic prospects for eventual economic
extraction. The location, quantity, grade, continuity and other geological characteristics of a Mineral
Resource are known, or estimated from specific geological evidence, sampling and knowledge
interpreted from an appropriately constrained and portrayed geological model. Mineral Resources
are subdivided, and must be so reported, in order of increasing confidence in respect of
geoscientific evidence, into Inferred, Indicated and Measured categories.

Net Smelter Return (NSR) Is defined as the return from sales of concentrates expressed in US$/tonne, i.e.: NSR = (Au price-Au
selling costs) x Au grade x Au recovery + (Cu price-Cu selling price) x Cu grade x Cu recovery.

pay limit The value at which it is estimated that ore can be mined at breakeven.

peneplain A low, nearly featureless, gently undulating land surface of considerable area, which has been
produced by the processes of long continued sub-aerial erosion.

Plant Recovery Factor The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the mass of the specific mineral product actually recovered
from ore treated at the plant to its total specific mineral content before treatment.

Probable Mineral Reserve Economically mineable material derived from a Measured or Indicated Mineral Resource or both.
It is estimated with a lower level of confidence than a Proved Mineral Reserve. It includes diluting
and contaminating materials and allows for losses that are expected to occur when the material is
mined. Appropriate assessments to a minimum of a Prefeasibility Study for a project or an LoM plan
for an operation must have been carried out, including consideration of and modification by, realistic
assumed mining, metallurgical, economic, marketing, legal, environmental, social and governmental
factors. Such modifying factors must be disclosed.

Proved Mineral Reserve Economically mineable material derived from a Measured Mineral Resource. It is estimated with
a high level of confidence. It includes diluting and contaminating materials and allows for losses
that are expected to occur when the material is mined. Appropriate assessments to a minimum
of a Prefeasibility Study for a project or an LoM plan for an operation must have been carried out,
including consideration of and modification by, realistic assumed mining, metallurgical, economic,
marketing, legal, environmental, social and governmental factors. Such modifying factors must be
disclosed.

regolith  Is a layer of loose unconsolidated rock that lies above a layer of bedrock.

tonnage discrepancy Difference between the tonnage hoisted as ore and that accounted for by the plant measuring
methods. Discrepancy is referred to as a shortfall when the calculated tonnage is less than the
tonnage accounted for by the plant, or an excess when the opposite occurs.

tonne(s)  Metric ton(s) = 1,000 kilograms.

uraninite  A strongly radioactive, brownish-black mineral, UO2, forming the chief ore of uranium (U3O8) and
containing variable amounts of radium, lead, thorium and other elements as impurities. 

Witwatersrand Basin A sedimentary basin in South Africa that contains close to a 6,000 metre thick sequence of
principally argillaceous and arenaceous sediments with inter-bedded auriferous conglomerates.

The Gold Fields Mineral Resource and Mineral Reserve Supplement to the Integrated Annual Report 31 December 2014
Disclaimer
Forward looking statements
Certain statements in this document constitute ‘forward looking statements’ within the meaning of section 27A of the US Securities Act
of 1933 and section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Such forward looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other important factors that could cause
the actual results, performance or achievements of the company to be materially different from the future results, performance or
achievements expressed or implied by such forward looking statements. Such risks, uncertainties and other important factors include
among others: economic, business and political conditions in South Africa, Ghana, Australia, Peru and elsewhere; the ability to achieve
anticipated efficiencies and other cost savings in connection with past and future acquisitions, exploration and development activities;
decreases in the market price of gold or copper; hazards associated with underground and surface gold mining; labour disruptions;
availability terms and deployment of capital or credit; changes in government regulations, particularly environmental regulations; and
new legislation affecting mining and mineral rights; changes in exchange rates; currency devaluations; inflation and other macro-
economic factors, industrial action, temporary stoppages of mines for safety reasons; and the impact of the Aids crisis in South Africa.
These forward looking statements speak only as of the date of this document. The company undertakes no obligation to update
publicly or release any revisions to these forward looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of this document
or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.
150 Helen Road
Sandown
Sandton, 2169
Johannesburg
Gauteng
South Africa

Private Bag X30500


Houghton, 2041
South Africa

Telephone: (+27) (11) 562 9700


Facsimile: (+27) (11) 562 9838
Website: www.goldfields.com

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen